2009 Gclass

463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.7.1
G-Class
Operator’s Manual
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 2
Symbols
Trademarks®:
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 1
Our company and staff congratulate you on

the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 2
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 3
Contents 3
Index........................................................ 4 At a glance............................................ 23
Introduction.......................................... 18 Safety and security.............................. 31
Controls in detail.................................. 57
Operation............................................ 145
Practical hints.................................... 193
Technical data.................................... 245

463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 4
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Alternator (Technical data)

see Vehicle specification
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System).... 53 Anticorrosion/antifreeze................... 256
4MATIC Antilock Brake System
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) see ABS
Anti-theft systems................................ 54
A Anti-theft alarm system.................... 54
ABS (Antilock Brake System).............. 51 Immobilizer....................................... 54
Indicator lamp................................. 214 Tow-away alarm................................ 55
Messages in the multifunction Aquaplaning
display............................................ 198 see Hydroplaning
Accessory weight............................... 172 Ashtrays.............................................. 133
Accidents.............................................. 85 Aspect ratio (tires)............................. 172
Air bag deployment........................... 33 Audio/DVD menu............................... 100
Emergency calls (Tele Aid).............. 136 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors......... 70
Additives Automatic central locking........... 60, 108
Engine oil........................................ 254 Automatic headlamp mode................. 73
Gasoline.......................................... 255 Automatic interior lighting control..... 77
Address change.................................... 20 Automatic locking when driving....... 108
Advanced Tire Pressure Automatic transmission...................... 87
Monitoring System (Advanced Emergency operation (limp-home
TPMS).................................................. 157 mode)............................................... 90
Messages in the multifunction Gear range indicator......................... 89
display.................................... 200, 212 Gear ranges...................................... 89
Air bags................................................. 33 Gear selector lever........................... 87
Children............................................ 33 Gearshifting malfunctions (limp-
Emergency call upon deployment... 136 home mode)..................................... 90
Front, driver and passenger.............. 35 Hill start assist system................... 114
Front passenger front air bag off Kickdown.......................................... 89
indicator lamp.................... 29, 36, 220 One-touch gearshifting..................... 90
Safety guidelines.............................. 34 Shifting procedure............................ 88
Window curtain................................. 36 Transmission position indicator........ 88
Air conditioning refrigerant and Transmission positions..................... 88
lubricant.............................................. 254 Axle oils............................................... 252
Air distribution................................... 123
Air pressure B
see Tire inflation pressure BabySmart™
Air pressure (tires)............................. 172 Air bag deactivation system.............. 36
Air recirculation mode....................... 124 Self-test............................................ 38
Air volume........................................... 123 Backrest
Alarm system see Seats
see Anti-theft systems Backup lamps
All-wheel drive (4MATIC)................... 114 Messages in the multifunction
Alternator display............................................ 209
Messages in the multifunction Replacing bulbs.............................. 226
display............................................ 206 Bar (air pressure unit)........................ 172
BAS (Brake Assist System).................. 51
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 5
Index 5
Batteries, SmartKey Central locking

Checking condition........................... 59 Automatic................................. 60, 108
Replacing........................................ 225 Locking/unlocking from inside......... 60
Battery, Vehicle.................................. 236 Central locking/unlocking switch...... 60
Charging......................................... 237 Certification label............................... 246
Jump starting.................................. 237 Children in the vehicle
Messages in the multifunction Air bags............................................ 33
display............................................ 206 BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
Bead (tire)........................................... 172 system.............................................. 36
Beverage holders Blocking of rear window operation. . . 49
see Cup holders Child safety locks (rear doors).......... 48
Brake fluid Child seat anchors – LATCH-type..... 48
Checking level................................ 152 Indicator lamp, front passenger
Messages in the multifunction front air bag off................................. 36
display............................................ 202 Infant and child restraint systems..... 45
Brake lamps Safety notes...................................... 44
Cleaning lenses.............................. 190 Tether anchorage points................... 47
High-mounted brake lamp.............. 226 Top tether................................... 44, 47
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226 Child safety
Brake pads see Children in the vehicle
Messages in the multifunction Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
display............................................ 202 see Children in the vehicle
Brakes................................................. 177 Chrome-plated exhaust tip,
Parking brake.................................... 86 cleaning............................................... 192
Warning lamp.................................. 215 Cigarette lighter................................. 134
Break-in period................................... 146 Climate control system
Brush guard........................................ 224 Air conditioning, cooling................. 121
Bulbs Air conditioning refrigerant............. 254
see Replacing bulbs Air distribution................................ 123
Air recirculation mode.................... 124
C Air volume...................................... 123
Automatic mode............................. 121
CAC (Customer Assistance Center).... 21 Deactivating system....................... 121
California retail buyers and Front defroster............................... 123
lessees, important notice for.............. 19 Residual engine heat (REST)........... 124
Calls (phone)....................................... 110 Temperature................................... 121
Can holders Cockpit.................................................. 25
see Cup holders Cold tire inflation pressure............... 172
Capacities and recommended COMAND system
fuel/lubricants................................... 252 see separate COMAND system
Cargo compartment operating instructions
Cargo volume, expanding............... 128 Combination switch............................. 74
Cover blind..................................... 129 Control system..................................... 97
Tie-down rings................................ 128 Multifunction display........................ 98
Cargo compartment cover blind....... 129 Multifunction steering wheel............ 97
Cargo tie-down rings.......................... 128 Resetting to factory settings........... 103
Carpets, cleaning............................... 192
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 6
6 Index
Control system menus......................... 99 Delayed shut-off

Audio/DVD..................................... 100 Exterior lamps................................. 107
Navigation...................................... 102 Interior lighting............................... 108
Settings.......................................... 103 Department of Transportation
Standard display............................... 99 see DOT
Telephone....................................... 110 Differential locks.................................. 93
Trip computer................................. 109 A few words about............................ 93
Vehicle status message memory.... 102 Difficulties
Control system submenus While driving..................................... 85
Convenience................................... 108 With starting..................................... 83
Instrument cluster.......................... 104 Digital speedometer.......................... 100
Lighting........................................... 106 Dimensions (vehicle)
Vehicle............................................ 108 see Vehicle specification
Convenience submenu Direction of rotation (tires)............... 164
Easy-entry/exit feature................... 109 Displays
Coolant Digital speedometer....................... 100
Anticorrosion/antifreeze................ 256 Maintenance service indicator........ 186
Capacities....................................... 253 Messages in the multifunction
Checking level................................ 152 display............................................ 196
Messages in the multifunction Multifunction display........................ 98
display............................................ 204 Outside temperature.............. 100, 105
Temperature gauge........................... 96 Symbol messages........................... 202
Coolant temperature gauge................ 26 Text messages................................ 198
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps... 76 Trip computer................................. 109
Cruise control..................................... 112 Vehicle status message memory.... 102
Last stored speed........................... 114 Vehicle system settings.................. 103
Messages in the mutlifunction Door control panel............................... 30
display............................................ 199 Door handles......................................... 30
Resume function............................. 114 Doors
Cup holders......................................... 131 Child safety locks............................. 48
Curb weight........................................ 172 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey)......... 58
Customer Assistance Center (CAC).... 21 Locking/unlocking from outside....... 58
Messages in the multifunction
D display............................................ 204
Opening from inside.......................... 59
Dashboard
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid)........ 139
see Instrument cluster
Unlocking (Mechanical key)............ 221
Data recording...................................... 22
DOT (Department of
Daytime running lamp mode............... 73
Transportation)................................... 173
Setting............................................ 106
Drinking and driving.......................... 177
Deep water
Driving
see Standing water
Abroad............................................ 185
Defogging (windshield)...................... 124
Hydroplaning.................................. 179
Defroster
Instructions.............................. 83, 176
Front (Climate control system)....... 123 In winter......................................... 176
Rear window................................... 125 Off-road.......................................... 179
Windshield...................................... 124 Problems.......................................... 85
Safety systems................................. 50
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 7
Index 7
Systems.......................................... 112 Remote door unlock....................... 139

Through standing water.................. 179 Tailgate, unlocking and opening..... 221
Driving and parking Emergency Tensioning Device
Safety notes...................................... 82 see ETD
Driving off..................................... 84, 179 Emission control................................ 185
Driving safety systems........................ 50 Information label............................. 247
4-ETS................................................ 53 System warranties............................ 18
ABS................................................... 51 Engine
BAS................................................... 51 Break-in recommendations............. 146
EBB................................................... 52 Cleaning......................................... 189
ESP®................................................. 52 Compartment................................. 148
Driving systems Malfunction indicator lamp
All-wheel drive (4MATIC)................. 114 ................................................. 26, 218
Cruise control................................. 112 Messages in the multifunction
Hill start assist................................ 114 display............................................ 204
Rear Parking Assist system............ 115 Number........................................... 247
Rear view camera........................... 117 Starting............................................. 83
Driving tips, automatic Turning off........................................ 86
transmission......................................... 89 Engine (Technical data)
see Vehicle specification
E Engine coolant
see Coolant
Easy-entry/exit feature............... 68, 109 Engine oil
EBB (Electronic Brake Booster)........... 52 Adding............................................ 151
Electrical system Additives......................................... 254
Improper work on or modifications... 21 Checking level................................ 149
Power outlets.................................. 134 Consumption.................................. 149
Electrical system (Technical data) Messages in the multifunction
see Vehicle specification display............................................ 207
Electronic Stability Program Oil dipstick...................................... 150
see ESP® Recommended engine oils and oil
Electronic Traction System filter................................................ 253
see 4-ETS ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)... 52
Emergency, in case of 4-ETS................................................ 53
Battery, jump starting..................... 237 Messages in the multifunction
First aid kit...................................... 194 display............................................ 198
Flat tire........................................... 232 Warning lamp.................................. 217
Hazard warning flasher..................... 75 ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Roadside Assistance......................... 19 Device).................................................. 43
Towing the vehicle.......................... 239 Safety guidelines.............................. 34
Emergency calls Express operation
Tele Aid........................................... 136 Power windows................................. 81
Emergency operations Tilt/sliding sunroof......................... 125
Gear selector lever, unlocking........ 222 Exterior lamp switch............................ 72
Limp-home mode.............................. 90 Exterior rear view mirrors................... 69
Locking/unlocking the vehicle....... 221 Parking position.......................... 70, 71
Power tilt/sliding sunroof............... 223 Exterior view of vehicle....................... 24
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 8
8 Index
F Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Capacities....................................... 252
Fastening the seat belts...................... 40 Fuel tank
First aid kit.......................................... 194 Capacity......................................... 253
Flat tire................................................ 232 Fuel filler flap and cap.................... 147
Lowering the vehicle....................... 235 Refueling......................................... 146
Mounting the spare wheel.............. 233 Fuses................................................... 242
Preparing the vehicle...................... 233
Spare wheel............................ 232, 251
G
Floormats............................................ 144
Fluids Garage door opener........................... 140
Automatic transmission fluid.......... 252 Gasoline
Brake fluid...................................... 252 see Fuel
Capacities....................................... 252 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).... 173
Engine coolant................................ 253 Gear range............................................ 89
Engine oil........................................ 252 Indicator........................................... 89
Power steering fluid........................ 252 Limiting............................................. 90
Washer and headlamp cleaning Shifting into optimal......................... 90
system............................................ 253 Transfer case.................................... 91
Fog lamps.............................................. 74 Gear selector lever............................... 87
Messages in the multifunction Cleaning......................................... 192
display.................................... 209, 211 Gearshift pattern.............................. 87
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226 Lock............................................ 83, 87
Four-wheel drive Shifting procedure............................ 88
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Transmission position indicator........ 88
Front air bags Transmission positions..................... 88
see Air bags Unlocking in an emergency............ 222
Front axle oil....................................... 252 Generator
Front lamps see Alternator
see Headlamps Global locking/unlocking
Front passenger front air bag............. 35 see Key, SmartKey
Front passenger front air bag off Glove box............................................ 130
indicator lamp........................ 29, 36, 220 Gross Axle Weight Rating
Fuel...................................................... 147 see GAWR
Additives......................................... 255 Gross Trailer Weight
Capacity, fuel tank.......................... 253 see GTW
Drive sensibly–safe fuel.................. 176 Gross Vehicle Weight
Fuel consumption statistics............ 109 see GVW
Fuel filler flap and cap.................... 147 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp see GVWR
................................................. 26, 218 GTW..................................................... 173
Premium unleaded gasoline GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)............. 173
....................................... 147, 253, 254 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Refueling......................................... 146 Rating)................................................. 173
Requirements................................. 255
Fuel filler flap...................................... 147
Opening manually........................... 223
Fuel gauge............................................. 26
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 9
Index 9
H Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning..... 191 Inside door handle............................... 59
Hazard warning flasher....................... 75 Instrument cluster......................... 26, 95
Headlamp cleaning system................. 75 Illumination....................................... 96
Headlamps Lamps............................................. 213
Automatic headlamp mode............... 73 Multifunction display........................ 98
Bi-Xenon......................................... 226 Instrument lighting
Cleaning lenses.............................. 190 see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Cleaning system............................... 75 Instrument panel
Daytime running lamp mode............. 73 see Instrument cluster
Delayed shut-off............................. 107 Instruments and controls
High-beam flasher............................. 75 see Cockpit
High-beam headlamps...................... 75 Interior lighting
Low-beam headlamps....................... 72 Cargo compartment lamps............... 78
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226 Delayed shut-off............................. 108
Switch............................................... 72 Front................................................. 77
Headliner, cleaning and care of........ 192 Front reading lamps.......................... 77
Head restraints..................................... 62 Rear.................................................. 77
Folding back..................................... 64 Rear reading lamps........................... 77
Rear seat, removing and installing.... 64 Interior rear view mirror...................... 69
Heated seats......................................... 66 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors........ 70
Heated steering wheel......................... 69 Interior storage spaces
Height adjustment see Storage compartments
Seat belt outlet................................. 42 Intermittent wiping
Seats................................................ 63 Windshield wipers............................. 80
High-beam flasher................................ 75
High-beam headlamps................. 75, 226
J
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226
High-mounted brake lamp................. 226 Jack...................................................... 195
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226 Jump starting...................................... 237
Hill start assist system...................... 114
Hood.................................................... 148 K
Messages in the multifunction Key, Mechanical................................. 221
display............................................ 204
Loss of.............................................. 59
Horn....................................................... 25
Key, SmartKey
Hydroplaning...................................... 179
Battery check lamp........................... 58
Checking batteries............................ 59
I Factory setting.................................. 59
Identification labels........................... 246 Global locking (SmartKey)................. 59
Identification number, vehicle Global unlocking (SmartKey)............. 59
(VIN).................................................... 247 Locking/unlocking............................ 58
Ignition............................................ 62, 83 Loss of.............................................. 59
Immobilizer........................................... 54 Messages in the multifunction
Infant and child restraint systems display............................................ 204
see Children in the vehicle Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof............................ 82
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 10
10 Index
Opening and closing the windows..... 82 Lighter

Remote control................................. 58 see Cigarette lighter
Replacing batteries......................... 225 Lighting................................................. 72
Restoring to factory setting.............. 59 Daytime running lamp mode............. 73
Selective setting............................... 59 Exterior............................................. 72
Starter switch positions.................... 62 Interior.............................................. 77
Kickdown.............................................. 89 Limp-home mode.................................. 90
Kilopascal (air pressure unit)............ 173 Loading
see Vehicle loading
L Locator lighting.................................. 106
Locking the vehicle.............................. 58
Labels
Manually......................................... 222
Certification.................................... 246
Loss of
Emission control information.......... 247
Key................................................... 59
Lamps, exterior
Service and Warranty Information
Exterior lamp switch......................... 72
booklet........................................... 246
Front............................................... 226
Low-beam headlamps.......................... 72
Messages in the multifunction
Exterior lamp switch......................... 72
display............................................ 209
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226
Rear................................................ 226
Switching on..................................... 72
Switching on/off............................... 72
Lubricants........................................... 252
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS........................................... 26, 214
Battery (SmartKey)........................... 58 M
Brakes............................................ 215 Maintenance......................................... 19
Engine malfunction................... 26, 218 Maintenance System......................... 185
ESP®......................................... 26, 217 Service indicator............................. 186
Fog lamps......................................... 74 Service indicator, resetting ............ 187
Front passenger front air bag off Service indicator display................. 186
........................................... 29, 36, 220 Service indicator message.............. 186
Fuel tank reserve...................... 26, 218 Service indicator message,
High-beam headlamps...................... 75 clearing........................................... 186
Instrument cluster.......................... 213 Service term exceeded................... 186
Low-beam headlamps....................... 72 Manual headlamp mode (Low-
Low tire pressure/TPMS beam headlamps)................................. 72
malfunction telltale......................... 219 Maximum engine speed
Seat belt telltale....................... 43, 216 see Vehicle specification
SRS.................................... 26, 32, 216 Maximum loaded vehicle weight...... 173
Turn signals...................................... 26 Maximum load rating (tires).............. 173
Language, selecting........................... 105 Maximum permissible tire
LATCH-type child seat anchors inflation pressure............................... 173
see Children in the vehicle Mechanical key................................... 221
License plate lamps........................... 226 Media interface.................................. 130
Messages in the multifunction Memory function.................................. 70
display............................................ 210 Menus
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226 see Control system menus
Light alloy wheels, cleaning.............. 191
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 11
Index 11
Mirrors Transfer case.................................. 203

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors........ 70 Turn signals.................................... 212
Exterior rear view mirror parking Washer fluid.................................... 204
positions..................................... 70, 71 Multifunction steering wheel
Exterior rear view mirrors................. 69 Adjusting.......................................... 67
Interior rear view mirror.................... 69 Buttons............................................. 97
Memory function.............................. 70 Cleaning......................................... 192
MON (Motor Octane Number)........... 255 Easy-entry/exit feature............ 68, 109
Motor Octane Number Heating............................................. 69
see MON Memory function.............................. 70
Multicontour seats............................... 65 Overview........................................... 27
Multifunction display........................... 98
Symbol messages........................... 202 N
Text messages................................ 198
Navigation menu................................ 102
Vehicle status messages................ 196
Net, parcel.......................................... 128
Multifunction display messages
Night security illumination......... 74, 107
ABS................................................. 198
Normal occupant weight................... 173
Advanced TPMS...................... 200, 212
Number, vehicle identification
Alternator....................................... 206
(VIN).................................................... 247
Battery............................................ 206
Brake fluid...................................... 202
Brake pads...................................... 202 O
Coolant........................................... 204 Occupant distribution........................ 173
Cruise control................................. 199 Occupant safety................................... 32
Display malfunction........................ 196 Air bags............................................ 33
Doors.............................................. 204 BabySmart™..................................... 36
Engine oil........................................ 207 Children and air bags........................ 33
ESP®............................................... 198 Children in the vehicle...................... 44
Fog lamps............................... 209, 211 Child seat anchors – LATCH-type..... 48
Gas cap.......................................... 208 Fastening the seat belts................... 40
High-beam lamps............................ 210 Front passenger front air bag off
Hood............................................... 204 indicator lamp........................... 36, 220
License plate lamps........................ 210 Infant and child restraint systems..... 45
Light sensor.................................... 210 Seat belts................................... 34, 38
Low-beam lamps............................. 210 Odometer.............................................. 98
Parking brake................................. 202 Off-road driving.................................. 179
Parking lamps................................. 210 Checklist................................ 180, 184
Reserve fuel.................................... 208 Crossing obstacles......................... 183
Reverse lamp.................................. 209 Driving instructions......................... 179
Side marker lamps.......................... 209 Driving on sand............................... 183
SmartKey........................................ 204 Driving through water..................... 182
SRS................................................. 199 Returning........................................ 184
Tailgate........................................... 204 Ruts................................................ 184
Tail lamps....................................... 211 Steep terrain................................... 181
Tele Aid........................................... 203 Oil
Tire pressure.......................... 200, 212 see Engine oil
Tire pressure monitor..................... 200
Tires....................................... 200, 212
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 12
12 Index
Oil level Operation.......................................... 81

see Engine oil, Checking level Rear door window, blocking
On-board computer operation.......................................... 49
see Control system Practical hints.................................... 194
One-touch gearshifting........................ 90 Problems
Operating safety................................... 21 While driving..................................... 85
Ornamental moldings, cleaning........ 189 With vehicle...................................... 21
Outside temperature Product information............................. 18
see Displays Production options weight................ 173
Overhead control panel....................... 30 Proximity key
see Key, SmartKey
P PSI (air pressure unit)........................ 173
Push-start
Paintwork, cleaning........................... 188
see Tow-start
Paintwork code.................................. 247
Panic alarm........................................... 49
R
Parcel net............................................ 128
Parking.................................................. 85 Radio
Rear Parking Assist system............ 115 Selecting stations........................... 100
Parking Assist Radio transmitters............................. 185
see Rear Parking Assist system Rain sensor........................................... 80
Parking brake....................................... 86 Rear axle oil........................................ 252
Messages in the multifunction Rear door ashtray
display............................................ 202 see Ashtrays
Parking position Rear doors
Exterior rear view mirrors........... 70, 71 Child safety locks............................. 48
Transmission position....................... 88 Rear door window
Parts service....................................... 246 Blocking operation............................ 49
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rear fog lamp
see Front passenger front air bag see Fog lamps
off indicator lamp Rear lamps
Passenger safety see Tail lamps
see Occupant safety Rear Parking Assist system.............. 115
Pedals.................................................. 177 Cleaning system sensors................ 190
Phone Malfunctions................................... 117
see Telephone Minimum distance.......................... 116
Plastic parts, cleaning....................... 191 Range............................................. 116
Power assistance............................... 177 Sensors.......................................... 115
Power outlets..................................... 134 Warning indicators.......................... 116
Power seats Rear seat head restraints
see Seats see Head restraints
Power tilt/sliding sunroof Rear view camera............................... 117
Opening/closing in an emergency.. 223 Cleaning the lens............................ 190
Operation........................................ 125 Rear window defroster...................... 125
Power washer..................................... 188 Rear window wiper/washer................ 80
Power windows.................................... 81 Recommended tire inflation
Cleaning......................................... 190 pressure...................................... 154, 173
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 13
Index 13
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle Seating capacity................................. 162

(Tele Aid)............................................. 140 Seats...................................................... 62
Refrigerant, air conditioning............. 254 Adjusting.......................................... 63
Refueling............................................. 146 Easy-entry/exit feature..................... 68
Regular checks................................... 148 Folding (expanding cargo volume). . 128
Reminder, Seat belt Heating............................................. 66
see Seat belts, Telltale Memory function.............................. 70
Remote control Multicontour seat............................. 65
see Key, SmartKey Ventilation........................................ 66
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid).......... 139 Securing cargo
Replacing bulbs.................................. 226 Cargo tie-down rings....................... 128
Reporting safety defects..................... 22 Selective setting
Research Octane Number see Key, SmartKey
see RON Selector lever
Reserve fuel see Gear selector lever
Messages in the multifunction Self-test
display............................................ 208 BabySmart™..................................... 38
Warning lamp.................................... 26 Tele Aid........................................... 136
Reset button................................... 27, 95 Service
Restraint systems see Maintenance
see Occupant safety Service, parts..................................... 246
Rims............................................ 174, 250 Service and warranty information...... 18
Roadside Assistance.................... 19, 137 Service intervals
RON (Research Octane Number)...... 255 see Maintenance System, Service
Roof rack............................................. 128 indicator
Route guidance Service life (tires)............................... 165
see Navigation system Settings
Rubber parts, cleaning...................... 191 Factory setting (SmartKey)............... 59
Individual (vehicle).......................... 103
S Memory function.............................. 70
Menu.............................................. 103
Safety Selective setting (SmartKey)............. 59
Driving safety systems...................... 50 Side marker lamps
Occupant safety................................ 32 Cleaning lenses.............................. 190
Reporting defects............................. 22 Messages in the multifunction
Safety belts display............................................ 209
see Seat belts Replacing bulbs.............................. 226
Seat belt force limiter.......................... 43 Sidewall (tires)................................... 174
Seat belts.............................................. 38 SmartKey
Children in the vehicle...................... 44 see Key, SmartKey
Cleaning......................................... 192 Snow chains....................................... 175
Fastening.......................................... 40 Snow tires
Height adjustment............................ 42 see Winter tires
Proper use of.................................... 39 Spare wheel................................ 195, 250
Safety guidelines.............................. 34 Mounting........................................ 233
Safety notes...................................... 38 Sport Utility Vehicle
Telltale............................................ 216 see SUV
Warning lamp.................................. 216
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 14
14 Index
SRS........................................................ 32 Premium unleaded gasoline............ 254

Indicator lamp.......................... 32, 216 Rims and tires................................. 250
Messages in the multifunction Spare wheel.................................... 251
display............................................ 199 Vehicle specification G 550............ 248
Standing water, driving through....... 179 Vehicle specification G 55 AMG..... 249
Starter switch positions...................... 62 Washer and headlamp cleaning
Starting difficulties (engine)............... 83 system.................................... 253, 257
Starting the engine.............................. 83 Technical data (dimensions)
Steering column see Vehicle specification
see Multifunction steering wheel, Technical data (electrical system)
Adjusting see Vehicle specification
Steering wheel Technical data (engine)
see Multifunction steering wheel see Vehicle specification
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services..... 140 Technical data (weights)
Storage compartments...................... 130 see Vehicle specification
Storing tires........................................ 166 Tele Aid............................................... 135
Stranded vehicle................................ 242 Emergency calls.............................. 136
Sunroof Information button.......................... 138
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Initiating an emergency call
Sun visors........................................... 132 manually......................................... 137
SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle).................. 20 Messages in the multifunction
display............................................ 203
T Remote door unlock....................... 139
Roadside Assistance button........... 137
Tachometer..................................... 26, 96 Search and send............................. 139
Overspeed range.............................. 96 SOS button..................................... 137
Tailgate Stolen Vehicle Recovery services... 140
Closing.............................................. 61 System self-test.............................. 136
Messages in the multifunction Telephone............................................. 27
display............................................ 204 Answering/ending a call................. 111
Opening............................................ 61 Hands-free microphone.................... 30
Tail lamps............................................ 226 Menu.............................................. 110
Cleaning lenses.............................. 190 Operation........................................ 110
Messages in the multifunction Phone book.................................... 111
display............................................ 211 Redialing......................................... 112
Replacing bulbs.............................. 226 Temperature
Tar stains............................................ 188 Coolant............................................. 96
Technical data Interior temperature....................... 121
Air conditioning refrigerant............. 254 Outside................................... 100, 105
Brake fluid...................................... 254 Tether anchorage points
Capacities fuels, coolants, see Children in the vehicle
lubricants etc.................................. 252 Tie-down rings.................................... 128
Coolant........................................... 255 Tightening torque
Engine oil additives......................... 254 Wheels............................................ 235
Engine oils...................................... 253 TIN (Tire Identification Number)....... 174
Fuel requirements........................... 255 Tire and Loading Information
Gasoline additives.......................... 255 placard................................................ 161
Identification labels........................ 246 Tire and loading terminology............ 172
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 15
Index 15
Tire Identification Number Treadwear indicators.............. 165, 174

see TIN Vehicle maximum load on............... 174
Tire inflation pressure Wear pattern................................... 167
Checking......................................... 156 Winter tires............................. 175, 250
Important notes on......................... 155 Tire speed rating........................ 169, 174
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar...... 161 Tongue Weight Rating
Tire labeling........................................ 168 see TWR
Tire load rating................................... 174 Top tether
Tire ply composition and material see Children in the vehicle
used..................................................... 174 Total load limit.................................... 174
Tires............................................ 154, 250 Tow-away alarm................................... 55
Advanced Tire Pressure Towing
Monitoring System (Advanced Vehicle............................................ 239
TPMS)............................................. 157 Tow-start..................................... 237, 239
Advanced TPMS low tire Traction............................................... 174
pressure/malfunction telltale Transfer case........................................ 91
(USA only)....................................... 219 Gear ranges...................................... 91
Advanced TPMS low tire pressure Messages in the multifunction
telltale (Canada only)...................... 219 display............................................ 203
Air pressure.................................... 154 Switching.......................................... 91
Care and maintenance.................... 165 Transmission
Cleaning......................................... 166 see Automatic transmission
Direction of rotation, spinning........ 164 Transmission fluid level..................... 153
Important notes on tire inflation Transmission gear selector lever
pressure......................................... 155 see Gear selector lever
Inflation pressure................... 156, 157 Transmission positions........................ 88
Information placard........................ 161 Traveling abroad................................ 185
Inspection....................................... 165 Tread (tires)........................................ 174
Labeling.......................................... 168 Tread depth (tires)..................... 165, 175
Load rating..................................... 174 Treadwear indicators (tires)..... 165, 174
Messages in the multifunction Trip computer menu.......................... 109
display.................................... 200, 212 Trip odometer, resetting...................... 96
Ply composition and material used. 174 Turning off the engine......................... 86
Problems under-/overinflation....... 156 Turn signals.......................................... 75
Retreads......................................... 154 Additional in mirrors....................... 226
Rims and tires (technical data)....... 250 Bulbs.............................................. 226
Rotation.......................................... 167 Cleaning lenses.............................. 190
Service life...................................... 165 Indicator lamps................................. 26
Sizes............................................... 250 Messages in the multifunction
Snow chains................................... 175 display............................................ 212
Speed rating........................... 169, 174 Replacing bulbs.............................. 226
Storing............................................ 166 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)............ 174
Temperature........................... 155, 167
Terminology.................................... 172
Tire Identification Number.............. 174
Traction.................................. 166, 174
Tread.............................................. 174
Tread depth............................ 165, 175
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 16
16 Index
U Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Vehicle weights
Standards................................... 166, 174 see Vehicle specification
Units, Settings
Speedometer.................................. 105
W
Unleaded gasoline, premium............ 254
Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 58 Warning sounds
Manually......................................... 221 Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt...... 43
Upholstery, cleaning.......................... 192 Parking brake................................. 202
Useful features................................... 131 Rear Parking Assist system............ 117
Seat belt telltale............................. 216
V Warranty coverage............................. 246
Washer and headlamp cleaning
Vehicle system................................................. 257
Battery............................................ 236 Washer fluid
Care................................................ 187 Messages in the multifunction
Control system................................. 97 display............................................ 204
Identification Number (VIN)............ 246 Mixing ratio..................................... 257
Individual settings........................... 103 Refilling........................................... 153
Locking/unlocking............................ 58 Wiping............................................... 80
Locking/unlocking manually.......... 221 Washing the vehicle........................... 187
Lowering (wheel change)................ 235 Wear pattern (tires)........................... 167
Modifications and alterations, Weights (vehicle)
Operating safety............................... 21 see Vehicle specification
Towing............................................ 239 Wheel
Vehicle dimensions Changing........................................ 232
see Vehicle specification Removing........................................ 234
Vehicle Identification Number Spare.............................................. 232
(VIN).................................................... 246 Tightening torque............................ 235
Vehicle jack Wheels, sizes...................................... 250
see Jack Wheels, Tires and............................... 154
Vehicle lighting..................................... 72 Window curtain air bags...................... 36
Vehicle loading Windows
Cargo tie-down rings....................... 128 see Power windows
Cargo volume, expanding............... 128 Windows, cleaning............................. 190
Instructions.................................... 126 Windshield
Load limit........................................ 162 Cleaning wiper blades..................... 190
Roof rack........................................ 128 Defogging....................................... 124
Terminology.................................... 172 Washer fluid.............................. 80, 257
Vehicle maximum load on the tire.... 174 Wipers.............................................. 79
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen Windshield defroster......................... 124
(Tele Aid)............................................. 140 Windshield wipers
Vehicle specification Rain sensor....................................... 80
G 550............................................. 248 Replacing wiper blades................... 231
G 55 AMG....................................... 249 Winter driving
Vehicle status message memory..... 102 Snow chains................................... 175
Vehicle tool kit................................... 194 Tires................................................ 175
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 17
Index 17
Winter driving instructions............... 176

Winter tires................................. 175, 250
Wood trims, cleaning......................... 192
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 18
18 Introduction
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product, and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating any equipment, any authorized
Use of such parts and accessories could Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to
adversely affect the safety, performance or demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 19
Introduction 19
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Control System Warranty Customer Assistance Center
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon One Mercedes Drive
Laws) Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail Maintenance

buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
automobiles
necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to a be performed at regular intervals.
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
purchase price or lease price, if after a you when you take the vehicle to an
reasonable number of repair attempts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its service. The service advisor will record each
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service in the booklet for you.
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Program provides factory-trained technical
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
reasonable number of repair attempts is toll-free Roadside Assistance number
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
more of the following occurs: 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
malfunction results in a condition that is Customer Assistance Representatives
likely to cause death or serious bodily 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Roadside Assistance will be provided in
or malfunction has been subject to repair accordance with standard program
two or more times, and you have directly guidelines which include providing service to
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
writing of the need for its repair, a paved roadway. We will make every effort
(2) the same substantial defect or to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
malfunction of a less serious nature than the accessibility of your vehicle will be
category (1) has been subject to repair determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
four or more times and you have directly Center technician or the tow service provider
notified us in writing of the need for its on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
repair, or in our ability to respond.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of Additional charges may be applicable for a
repair of the same or different substantial breakdown location determined not to be a
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative reasonably accessible roadside location as
total of more than 30 calendar days. determined by our authorized technician and
tow service provider.
Written notification should not be sent to a
For additional information refer to the
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 20
20 Introduction
Program brochure (in the USA) or the In the USA:

Roadside Assistance section of the Service Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
and Warranty Information Booklet (in European Delivery Department
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Change of address or ownership Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
If you change your address, be sure to send European Delivery Department
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
the Service and Warranty Information Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service Sport Utility Vehicle
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will G Warning!
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both
should the need arise.
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel
literature with the vehicle to make it available drive passenger cars are not intended. This
to the next operator. vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to from conventional passenger cars in driving
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used conditions which may occur on streets,
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty highways and off-road use.
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the and a higher center of gravity than many
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. type, if you make sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may
roll over or may go out of control and crash.
Operating your vehicle outside the Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
USA or Canada rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
countries, please be aware that: result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
Rservice
and severe or fatal injury.
facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available, Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Operator’s Manual. Take time to become
Runleaded gasoline for vehicles with familiar with the driving characteristics of this
catalytic converters may not be available; vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all
the use of leaded fuels will damage the vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle
catalysts, handles on different road surfaces. Do not
Rgasoline may have a considerably lower attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving
engine damage. actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available When driving off-road or working the vehicle
for delivery in Europe under our European hard, do not overload it. And, always wear
Delivery Program. For details, consult an your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 21
Introduction 21
an unbelted person is significantly more likely qualified maintenance or repair facility for
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. further inspection or repairs.
Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
G Warning! familiar with the following information and
Work improperly carried out on electronic rules:
components and associated software could Rthe safety precautions in this manual
cause them to cease functioning. Because the
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made may Rtraffic rules and regulations
produce an undesired effect on other Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your G Warning!
vehicle. Various warning labels are attached to your
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended to
for repairs or modifications to electronic make you and others aware of various risks.
components. Do not remove any of these warning labels
Other improper work or modifications on the unless explicitly instructed to do so by
vehicle could also have a negative impact on information on the label itself. Removing
the operating safety of the vehicle. warning labels may cause you and others to
Some safety systems only function while the be unaware of certain risks which may result
engine is running. You should therefore never in an accident and/or personal injury.
turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning! Problems with your vehicle

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and If you should experience a problem with your
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
Such blows can be caused, for example, by affect its safe operation, we urge you to
running over an obstacle, road debris or a contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
pothole. If you feel a sudden significant immediately to have the problem diagnosed
vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect and corrected if required. If the matter is not
that damage to your vehicle as occurred: handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
Rturn
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
on your hazard warning flashers
management or, if necessary, contact us at
Rslow down carefully one of the following addresses:
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe In the USA:
distance from the road Customer Assistance Center
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle One Mercedes Drive
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 22
22 Introduction
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Vehicle data recording

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
Reporting safety defects (Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
For the USA only:
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
The following text is published as required of devices that can record vehicle systems data
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the transmit some data in certain accidents.
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
This information helps, for example, to
of 1966”.
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
Reporting safety defects
share it with others
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
which could cause a crash or could cause purposes
injury or death, you should immediately
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to lessee
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Rin response to an official request by law
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may enforcement or other government agency
open an investigation, and if it finds that a Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
may order a recall and remedy campaign. organization and/or
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Please check the Tele Aid subscription
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle service agreement for details regarding the
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 information that may be recorded or
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to transmitted via that system.
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 23
23
Exterior view ....................................... 24

Cockpit ................................................. 25
Instrument cluster .............................. 26
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 27
Center console .................................... 28
Overhead control panel ...................... 30
Door control panel .............................. 30
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 24
24 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Tailgate: D Exterior rear view mirrors 69
Opening and closing 61 E Front lamps 226
Unlocking manually 221
F Hood 148
; Rear window defroster 125
G Windshield:
= Rear view camera 117 Wiping with washer fluid 80
? Wipers 79 Cleaning 190
Wiper blades, replacing 231 Windshield defroster 124
Wiper blades, cleaning 190 H Power tilt/sliding sunroof 125
A Rear lamps 226 I Headlamp cleaning system 75
B Fuel filler flap 146 J Tires and wheels 154
C Doors: Rims and tires 250
Locking and unlocking 58 K Towing eyes 239
Opening 59
Locking and unlocking
manually 221
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 25
Cockpit 25
Cockpit
At a glance
: Combination switch: E Glove box 130
• Turn signals 75 F Center console 28
• Wipers 79 G Multifunction steering 27,
• High beam 75 wheel 97
; Headlamp cleaning button 75 H On-board diagnostics
(OBD) socket
= Cruise control lever 112
I Hood lock release lever 148
? Horn
J Steering wheel adjustment 67
A Instrument cluster 26,
95 Heated steering wheel 69
B Lever for Voice Control K Exterior lamp switch 72

System, see separate L Exterior rear view mirror
operating instructions adjustment 69
C Starter switch 62
D Glove box lock 130
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 26
26 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Speedometer with: A Tachometer with:
L Low-beam headlamp ! Antilock Brake
indicator lamp 72 System (ABS) indicator
d Electronic Stability lamp 214
Program (ESP®) warning 7 Seat belt telltale 43,
lamp 217 216
h Combination low tire + Supplemental
pressure/TPMS Restraint System (SRS) 32,
malfunction telltale, USA 157, indicator lamp 216
only 219 = Engine malfunction
h Low tire pressure 157, indicator lamp, USA only 218
telltale, Canada only 219 ; Engine malfunction
$ Brake warning lamp, indicator lamp, Canada only 218
USA only 215 K High-beam headlamp
J Brake warning lamp, indicator lamp 75
Canada only 215 B Fuel gauge with:
; # Left turn signal 8 Fuel tank reserve
indicator lamp 75 warning lamp ( the arrow
indicates that the fuel filler
= Multifunction display 98 flap is on the right-hand
? ! Right turn signal side) 218
indicator lamp 75 C Coolant temperature gauge 96
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 27
Multifunction steering wheel 27
Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

D Reset button for:
At a glance
Trip odometer 96
Settings 103
Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination 96
Function Page
: Multifunction display 98
; Press button W or X
• to select submenus in
the Settings menu 104
• to set values
• to set the volume
= Press button 6
• to answer a call 110
• to dial1 110
• to redial1 110
Press button ~
• to end a call 110
• to reject an incoming
call 110
? Press button V or U
to select next or previous
menu 97
1 Function only available in telephone menu.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 28
28 Center console
Function Page Center console

A Press button & or * Upper part
At a glance
briefly
• to move within a menu
• to select previous or
next track, or stored
station within Audio/
DVD menu 100
• to switch to the phone
book and select a name
or number within
Telephone menu 110
Press and hold button
& or *
• to select previous or
next track with quick
search, or to select
previous or next station
in station list or wave
band within Audio/
Function Page
DVD menu 100
• to start the quick : Seat heating switch,
search in the phone driver’s side 66
book within Telephone ; Windshield defroster
menu 110 switch 124
i Canada vehicles: The steering wheel in = Rear window wiper/washer
this vehicle may vary from steering wheel switch 80
shown. However, multifunction steering
wheel symbols and feature description ? Electronic Stability
apply to Canada vehicles as well. Program (ESP®) switch 52
A Differential lock switches 93
i G 55 AMG: The steering wheel in this
vehicle may vary from steering wheel B Central unlocking switch 60
shown. However, multifunction steering Central locking switch 60
wheel symbols and feature description
apply to AMG vehicles as well. C Alarm system indicator
lamp 54
Tow-away alarm off switch 55
D Seat heating switch, front
passenger side 66
E Seat ventilation switch,
front passenger side 66
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 29
Center console 29
Function Page Lower part

F Hazard warning flasher
At a glance
switch 75
G Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp 36
H COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
I Climate control 119
J Ashtray 133
Cigarette lighter 134
K Seat ventilation switch,
driver’s side 66
Function Page
: Storage compartment 130
; Gear selector lever 87
= Transfer case switch 91
? Parking brake lever 86
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 30
30 Door control panel
Overhead control panel Door control panel

At a glance

: Tele Aid (emergency call : Switches for opening/
system) button 137 closing front and rear door
windows 81
; Cargo compartment lamps
on/off 78 Override switch 49
= Right reading lamp on/off 77

; Seat adjustment 63
? Power tilt/sliding sunroof

= Inside door handle 59
switch 125 ? Memory function (for
A Automatic interior lighting 77 storing seat, exterior rear
view mirrors, and steering
B Interior rear view mirror 69 wheel settings) 70
C Garage door opener 140
D Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone
E Left reading lamp on/off 77
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 31
31
Vehicle equipment .............................. 32

Occupant safety .................................. 32
Panic alarm .......................................... 49
Driving safety systems ....................... 50
Anti-theft systems .............................. 54
Safety and security

463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 32
32 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment to the restraint systems no longer functioning

as intended.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
features, standard or optional, potentially (ETDs), for example, could deploy
available for your vehicle at the time of inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your although the deceleration threshold for air
vehicle might not be equipped with all bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
features described in this manual. never modify the restraint systems. Do not
tamper with electronic components or their
software.
Occupant safety
Introduction i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
In this section you will learn the most restraint systems for infants and children,
important facts about the restraint system see “Children in the vehicle”
components of the vehicle. (Y page 44).
The restraint systems are:
RSeat belts
SRS indicator lamp
RChild restraints
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren the ignition is switched on and in regular
(LATCH) intervals while the engine is running. This
Additional protection potential is provided by: facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with The + indicator lamp in the instrument
- Air bags cluster comes on when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a few
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) seconds after the engine has been started.
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for The SRS components are in operational
front and rear outer seat belts readiness if the + indicator lamp is not lit
- Seat belt force limiter when the engine is running.
RAir
A malfunction in the system has been
bag system components with
detected if the + indicator lamp
- Front passenger front air bag off Rfails to go out after approximately
indicator lamp 4 seconds after the engine is started
- Front passenger seat with BabySmartTM Rdoes not come on at all
air bag deactivation system
Rcomes on after the engine was started or
Although the systems are independent, their while driving
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other. G Warning!
In the event that the + indicator lamp
G Warning! comes on while driving or does not come on
Modifications to or work improperly at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
conducted on restraint system components malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
or their wiring, as well as tampering with recommend that you contact an authorized
interconnected electronic systems, can lead Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 33
Occupant safety 33
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may seated position and to wear their respective
not deploy when needed in an accident, which seat belt.
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it For maximum protection in the event of a
might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily collision always be in normal seated position
which could also result in injury. with your back against the seat backrest.
Safety and security

In addition, improper work on the SRS creates Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or properly positioned on your body.
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work Since the air bag inflates with considerable
on the SRS must therefore only be performed speed and force, a proper seating position
by qualified technicians. Contact an and correct positioning of the hands on the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
to accommodate a person with disabilities, not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center properly or are too close to the air bag can be
or call our Customer Assistance Center at seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for inflates with great force instantaneously:
details. RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
Air bags RMove the driver seat as far back as
G Warning! possible, still permitting proper operation
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of vehicle controls. The distance from the
of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts center of the driver’s chest to the center of
(front air bags), or side impacts (window the air bag cover on the steering wheel
curtain air bags). However, no system must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
available today can completely eliminate You should be able to accomplish this by
injuries and fatalities. adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any difficulties, please contact an
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious RDo not lean your head or chest close to the
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the steering wheel or dashboard.
vehicle. The dust might cause some RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
temporary breathing difficulty for people with wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid the rim can increase the risk and potential
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any front air bag inflates.
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or door. possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
G Warning! ROccupants, especially children, should
To reduce the risk of injury when the front air never place their bodies or lean their heads
bags inflate, it is very important for the driver in the area of the door where the window
and front passenger to always be in a properly curtain air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the window
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 34
34 Occupant safety
curtain air bag be deployed. Always sit as exceed preset deployment thresholds. Only
upright as possible, wear the seat belt in the event of such a situation will they
properly and use an appropriately sized provide their supplemental protection.
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or The driver and passengers should always
booster seat recommended for the size and wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
Safety and security
weight of the child. possible for the air bags to provide their
RChildren 12 years old and under must never supplemental protection.
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes- In case of other types of impacts and impacts
Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible below air bag deployment thresholds, air
child seat, which operates with the bags will not deploy. The driver and
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system passengers will then be protected to the
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the extent possible by a properly fastened seat
front passenger front air bag when it is belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
installed properly. Otherwise they will be needed to provide the best possible
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a protection in a rollover.
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
will result. Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
Failure to follow these instructions can result
air bags.
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
It is important to your safety and that of your
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
passengers that you replace deployed air
make the buyer aware of this safety
bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
to make sure the vehicle will continue to
Operator’s Manual.
provide supplemental crash protection for
G Warning! occupants.
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children in an automobile is in the rear Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
years old or under in the front passenger seat and air bag
of your vehicle, you must properly use a G Warning!
BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
the front passenger front air bag. been subjected to stress in an accident
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please must be replaced and their anchoring
follow these guidelines: points must also be checked. Only use seat
(1) Always sit as upright as possible, belts installed or supplied by an authorized
properly use the seat belts, and for Mercedes-Benz Center.
children 12 years old and under, RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
use an appropriately sized infant Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
restraint, toddler restraint, or perchlorate material, which may require
booster seat recommended for the special handling and regard for the
size and weight of the child. environment. Check with your local
(2) Always wear seat belts properly. government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
frontal impacts (front air bags) and in side
impacts (window curtain air bags) which
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 35
Occupant safety 35
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ therefore only be performed by qualified

Perchlorate/index.cfm. technicians. Contact an authorized
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function Mercedes-Benz Center.
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD RFor your protection and the protection of
that is deployed must be replaced. others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
Safety and security

RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. ETD, our safety instructions must be
They could tear. followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not make any modification that could Center.
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
required inflation volume, and the material
severely weaken them. In a crash they may of the air bags, there is the possibility of
not be able to provide adequate protection. abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RNo modifications of any kind may be made injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
This includes changing or removing any If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
component or part of the SRS, the recommend that you inform the subsequent
installation of additional trim material, seat owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS
covers, badges, etc. over the steering and refer them to the applicable section in the
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag Operator’s Manual.
cover, outboard sides of the seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door frame Front air bags
trims, and installation of additional
electrical/electronic equipment on or near
G Observe Safety notes, see page 33.
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between air bags and occupants free of
objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas,
etc.).
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may be thrown around in
the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hot after Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. front air bag ; are designed to provide
RNever place your feet on the instrument increased protection for the driver and front
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always passenger against the risk of injuries to the
keep both feet on the floor in front of the head and thorax.
seat. Driver and front passenger front air bags are
RIn addition, improper repair work on the deployed
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
inoperative or causing unintended air bag Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
deployment. Work on the SRS must
threshold
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 36
36 Occupant safety
Rif the system determines that air bag When deployed, window curtain air bags :
deployment can offer additional protection are designed to provide increased protection
to that provided by the seat belt for the head (but not the chest or arms) of the
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is in occupants on the side of the vehicle on which
use the impact occurs.
Safety and security
Rindependently
Window curtain air bags : are deployed
of the window curtain air
bags Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which Rin side impacts exceeding a preset
do not exceed the system’s preset deployment threshold
deployment thresholds. You will then be Rindependently of the front air bags
protected by the fastened seat belts.
Rregardless of whether the front passenger
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
seat is occupied
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration Rregardless of whether the seat belt is in use
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system
the front air bags. determines that air bag deployment can
The front passenger front air bag will only be offer additional protection to that provided
deployed if by the seat belt
Rthe front passenger seat is occupied Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
Rthe 4/ indicator lamp in the center in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
console is not lit (Y page 36) deployment threshold.
Rthe
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold indicated by the arrows.
! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lb

(9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
could cause the front air bag on the front system
passenger side to deploy in a crash which Your vehicle is equipped with the
exceeds the system’s deployment
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system.
threshold.
G Warning!
Window curtain air bags According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
G Observe Safety notes, see page 33. seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 37
Occupant safety 37
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and installed, please check installation.
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the Periodically check the 4/ indicator
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. lamp while driving to make sure the
Occupants, especially children, should always 4/ indicator lamp is illuminated. If
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt the 4/ indicator lamp goes out or
Safety and security

properly and use an appropriately sized infant remains out, do not transport a child on the
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat front passenger seat until the system has
recommended for the size and weight of the been repaired.
child. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Children can be killed or seriously injured by front passenger seat will be seriously
an inflating air bag. Note the following injured or even killed if the front passenger
important information when circumstances front air bag inflates.
require you to place a child in the front RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
passenger seat: facing child restraint on the front passenger
RChildren 12 years old and under must never seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes- use the proper child restraint
Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible recommended for the age, size and weight
child seat, which operates with the of the child, and secure child restraint with
BabySmartTM system installed in the the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
vehicle to deactivate the front passenger seat manufacturer’s instructions.
front air bag when it is installed properly.
Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag G Warning!
when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, When using a BabySmartTM compatible child
serious or fatal injury will result. seat on the front passenger seat, the front
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger front air bag will not deploy only if
front passenger seat will be seriously the 4/ indicator lamp remains
injured or even killed if the front passenger illuminated.
front air bag inflates in a collision which Please be sure to check the 4/
could occur under some circumstances, indicator lamp every time you use a
even with the air bag technology installed BabySmartTM compatible child seat on the
in your vehicle. The only means to front passenger seat. Should the 4/
completely eliminate this risk is to never indicator lamp go out while the restraint is
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint installed, please check installation. If the
in the front seat. We therefore strongly 4/ indicator lamp remains out, do not
recommend that you always place a child use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport a
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. child on the front passenger seat until the
RIf you must install a BabySmartTM system has been repaired.
compatible rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 4/ indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 4/ indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 38
38 Occupant safety
devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM

air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 4/
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test
or be continuously lit, indicating that the
Safety and security
system is not functioning.
G Warning!
The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system
will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz compatible.
system, are required for use with the
Never place anything between seat cushion
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system.
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the effectiveness off the BabySmartTM air bag
Center for information on availability. With
deactivation system. The bottom of the child
the special child seat installed properly, the
seat must make full contact with the front
front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
The 4/ indicator lamp : will be mounted child seat could cause injuries to the
illuminated, except with the SmartKey child in case of an accident, instead of
removed from the starter switch or with the protecting the child.
starter switch in position 0.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
The system does not deactivate the window installation of special child seats.
curtain air bag and the Emergency Tensioning
Device (ETD).
Seat belts
Self-test BabySmart™ without special
child seat installed Safety notes
After turning the SmartKey in the starter The use of seat belts and infant and child
switch to position 1 or 2 the 4/ restraint systems is required by law in all 50
indicator lamp comes on for approximately states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
6 seconds and then goes out. territories and all Canadian provinces.
If the 4/ indicator lamp should not Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
come on or is continuously lit, the system is occupants should have their seat belts
not functioning. You must see an authorized fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any For information on infants and children
child on the front passenger seat. More traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
information can be found in the “Practical systems for infants and children, see
hints” section (Y page 220). “Children in the vehicle” (Y page 44).
G Warning! G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
phones, electronic tags such as those used in Always make sure all of your passengers are
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 39
Occupant safety 39
properly restrained. You and your passengers Do not make any modifications to the seat
should always wear seat belts. belts. This can lead to unintended activation
Failure to wear and properly fasten and of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
position your seat belt greatly increases your necessary.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Safety and security

accident. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can not be able to provide adequate protection.
be considerably more severe without your Have all work carried out only by qualified
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat technicians. Contact an authorized
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit Mercedes-Benz Center.
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously injured or killed. Proper use of seat belts
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing G Warning!
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
as intended if the occupants are properly RSeat belts can only work when used
wearing their seat belts. properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
G Warning!
that could result in serious injuries in case
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat of an accident.
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under at all times, because seat belts help reduce
it, the seat belt would apply force at the the likelihood of and potential severity of
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and The integrated restraint system includes
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger
wearer is in a position that is as upright as front air bag, window curtain air bags for
possible and the seat belt is properly door windows), Emergency Tensioning
positioned on the body. Devices (ETDs) and seat belt force limiters.
The system is designed to enhance the
G Warning! protection offered to properly belted
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
there are seat belts available. Make sure and ETDs) and side (window curtain air bags
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never deployment thresholds.
use a seat belt for more than one person at a RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
time. arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
G Warning! too far forward. That would increase the
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
been subjected to stress in an accident must belt would also apply too much force to the
be replaced and their anchoring points must ribs or abdomen, which could severely
also be checked. injure internal organs such as your liver or
Only use seat belts which have been approved spleen.
by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 40
40 Occupant safety
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder booster seats, always follow the child seat
section is located as close as possible to manufacturer’s instructions.
the middle of the shoulder (it should not
touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder G Warning!
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
Safety and security
this purpose, you can adjust the height of could tear.

the seat belt outlet. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
your hips and not across the abdomen. If This could damage the seat belt.
the lap belt is positioned across your Never attempt to make modifications to seat
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
a crash. the seat belts.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing, Fastening the seat belts
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries. G Warning!
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted According to accident statistics, children are
snugly. Take special care of this when safer when properly restrained in the rear
wearing loose clothing. seating positions than in the front seating
RNever use a seat belt for more than one children be placed in the rear seats whenever
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt possible. Regardless of seating position,
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
crash, you would not have the full width of restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. the size and weight of the child. For additional
The twisted seat belt against your body information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
could cause injuries. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
RPregnant women should also always use a significantly increased if the child restraints
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
should be positioned as low as possible on or the child is not properly secured in the child
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on restraint.
the abdomen.
G Warning!
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
Children 12 years old and under must never
as upright as possible. ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible
sure it is properly positioned. child seat, which operates with the
RNever place your feet on the instrument BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always to deactivate the front passenger front air bag
keep both feet on the floor in front of the when it is installed properly. Otherwise they
seat. will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in
a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant will result.
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 41
Occupant safety 41
Front seat belts and rear outer seat belts Rear center seat belt
Safety and security

Overview
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
: Attachment for latch plates
of seat belt outlet :.
; Buckle for fixed latch plate
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap = Release button for fixed latch plate
portion across your hips. ? Fixed latch plate
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it A Buckle for free-sliding latch plate
clicks. B Release button for free-sliding latch plate
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the C Free-sliding latch plate
correct height (Y page 42).
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
To release the seat belt with seat belt relase
button ?, see (Y page 43).
X Pull both latch plates ? and C out of

attachment :.
The seat belt has two latch plates: Latch
plate ? is fixed at the end of the seat belt.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 42
42 Occupant safety
Latch plate C is free-sliding across the X Guide the seat belt at free-sliding latch
seat belt. plate C across your body.
Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
Safety and security
X Push free-sliding latch plate C into buckle

A until it clicks.
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
Seat belt outlet height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the seat belt
outlet for the following seats:
RDriver’s seat
RFront passenger seat
RRear outer seats
i To release buckle ; from fixed latch
plate ?, press release button = using a
suitable object, e.g. a screwdriver or a coin.
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
of attachment :.
X Push fixed latch plate ? into buckle ;
until it clicks.
X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height

adjuster upward.
The seat belt outlet height adjuster
engages in different positions.
X Lowering: Press and hold release
button :.
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster
downward.
X Release button : and make sure the seat
belt outlet height adjuster engages into
place.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 43
Occupant safety 43
Releasing the seat belts 6 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened.
X Releasing front seat belts and rear
outer seat belts: Press seat belt release The seat belt telltale 7 and the warning
button ? (Y page 41). chime will go out if the driver’s seat belt is
Allow the retractor to completely rewind fastened.
Safety and security

the seat belt by guiding latch plate ; For more information, see “Practical hints”
(Y page 41). (Y page 216).
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot seat belt force limiter
get caught or pinched in the door or in the
seat mechanism. This can damage the seat The seat belts for the front seats and rear
belt and impair its effectiveness, and/or outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
cause damage to the door and/or door trim belt force limiters.
panel. Such damage is not covered by the The ETDs are designed to activate in the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. following cases:
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz the system’s preset deployment threshold
Center. Rif the restraint systems are operational and
X Releasing rear center seat belt: Press functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator
release button B on buckle A for free- lamp” (Y page 32)
sliding latch plate C (Y page 41). The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
X Press release button = on buckle ; for if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
fixed latch plate ? (Y page 41). properly inserted into buckle).
X Allow the retractor to completely rewind The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
the rear center seat belt by guiding fixed with or without the respective seat belts
latch plate ? (Y page 41). fastened.
X Guide both latch plates ? and C one after
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
the other into attachment : (Y page 41).
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
G Warning! limiters, when activated, are employed to
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
To help prevent the possibility of injury,
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
always store the rear center seat belt latch
plates in the attachment when the rear center i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
seat belt is not in use. position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull occupants back
Seat belt reminder system toward the seat backrest.
When the engine is started, the seat belt G Warning!
telltale 7 will always illuminate to remind Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
you and your passengers to fasten your seat replaced.
belts. For your safety, when disposing of the
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
the engine is started, an additional warning
chime will also sound for a maximum of
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 44
44 Occupant safety
instructions. These are available at any Seat and head restraint

XPosition the seat and head restraint
Correct driver seat adjustment properly. See (Y page 63) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Safety and security
G Warning! Observe the following points:

In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle RAlways be in a properly seated position.
control, all seat, head restraint, steering
RThe position should be as far rearward from
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be done the front air bag in the steering wheel as
before the vehicle is put into motion. possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
Steering wheel RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 67. accelerator/brake pedal safely.
XPosition the steering wheel properly RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can
(Y page 68). correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
Make sure: RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
RYou can reach the steering wheel with your is as nearly upright as possible.
arms slightly bent at the elbows. RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
RYou can move your legs freely. edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
RAll displays (including malfunction and your legs.
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
are clearly visible. close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
Seat belt back of the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while the seat is being
XFasten and position your seat belt correctly adjusted.
(Y page 40).
Make sure:
RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly. Children in the vehicle
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder Safety notes
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
vehicle:
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
X Secure the child using an infant or child
as possible on your hips.
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 45
Occupant safety 45
G Warning! Infant and child restraint systems

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the G Observe Safety notes, see page 44.
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
We recommend all infants and children be
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
vehicle is in motion.
Safety and security

the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an Only use a BabySmartTM compatible child
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised restraint for the front passenger seat in this
access to a vehicle could result in an accident vehicle.
and/or serious personal injury. The children All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
could belt have special seat belt retractors for
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with retract. During seat belt retraction, a
vehicle equipment that can be operated ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
even if the SmartKey is removed from the that the special seat belt retractor is
starter switch or removed from the vehicle, activated. The seat belt is now locked. Push
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel down on child restraint to take up any slack.
adjustment, or the memory function. To deactivate, release the seat belt buckle
If children open a door, they could injure other and let the seat belt retract completely. The
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure seat belt can then again be used in the usual
themselves or be injured by following traffic. manner.
Do not expose the child restraint system to G Warning!
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
metal parts, for example, could become very
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
hot, and the child could be burned on these
retractor will be deactivated.
parts.
G Warning! i Information on child seats with mounting

fittings for tether anchorages
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
(Y page 47).
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place. For information on LATCH-type child seat
anchors (Y page 48).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event The use of infant or child restraints is required
of by law in all 50 states, the District of
Rstrong braking maneuvers Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Rsudden
Canadian provinces.
changes of direction
Infants and small children should be seated
Ran accident in an appropriate infant or child restraint
system, properly secured in accordance with
For more information on loading, see
the manufacturer’s instructions for the child
(Y page 126).
restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 46
46 Occupant safety
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Benz authorized BabySmartTM compatible

Standards 213 and 210.2. child seat, which operates with the
A statement by the child restraint BabySmartTM system installed in the
manufacturer of compliance with these vehicle to deactivate the front passenger
standards can be found on the instruction front air bag when it is installed properly.
Safety and security
label on the restraint and in the instruction Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag
manual provided with the restraint. when it inflates in a crash. If this happens,
When using any infant restraint, toddler serious or fatal injury will result.
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s front passenger seat will be seriously
instructions for installation and use. injured or even killed if the front passenger
Please read and observe warning labels front air bag inflates in a collision which
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to could occur under some circumstances,
infant or child restraints. even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
G Warning!
completely eliminate this risk is to never
According to accident statistics, children are
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
safer when properly restrained in the rear
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
seating positions than in the front seating
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be restraint on the front passenger seat
seated and properly secured in an appropriate because circumstances require you to do
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster so, make sure the 4/ indicator lamp
seat recommended for the size and weight of is illuminated, indicating that the front
the child. passenger front air bag is deactivated.
The infant or child restraint must be properly Should the 4/ indicator lamp not
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat illuminate or go out while the restraint is
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and installed, please check installation.
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the Periodically check the 4/ indicator
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. lamp while driving to make sure the
4/ indicator lamp is illuminated. If
Occupants, especially children, should always
the 4/ indicator lamp goes out or
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant remains out, do not transport a child on the
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat front passenger seat until the system has
recommended for the size and weight of the been repaired.
child. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Children can be killed or seriously injured by front passenger seat will be seriously
an inflating air bag. Note the following injured or even killed if the front passenger
important information when circumstances front air bag inflates.
require you to place a child in the front RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
passenger seat: facing child restraint on the front passenger
RChildren 12 years old and under must never seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes- use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 47
Occupant safety 47
of the child, and secure child restraint with This vehicle is equipped with tether
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
seat manufacturer’s instructions. the rear seating positions. The anchorage
rings are located on the floor behind each rear
G Warning! seat.
Safety and security

Infants and small children should never share Top tether straps enable an additional
a seat belt with another occupant. During an connection to be made between child
accident, they could be crushed between the restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
occupant and seat belt. anchors and rear seats. This can further
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is reduce the risk of injury.
significantly increased if the child restraints X Remove the cargo compartment cover
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ blind, if installed (Y page 129).
or the child is not properly secured in the child X Guide the top tether strap between head
restraint. restraint and top of the seat backrest.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must The head restraint must be installed and
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position positioned such that the top tether strap
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not can pass freely between the head restraint
face or neck. A booster seat may be and top of the seat backrest.
necessary to achieve proper seat belt X Make sure the top tether strap is not
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until twisted.
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
Installation of infant and child restraint

systems
X Fold up anchorage ring :.
G Warning!
X Securely fasten hook ;, which is part of
Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
top tether strap, to anchorage ring :.
position when the rear seats are occupied by
passengers, before installing top tether
straps, or the extended cargo compartment is
not in use. Make sure that seat backrests are
secured properly by pushing and pulling on
the seat backrests. If a seat backrest is not
locked properly, the seat backrest could fold.
The child seat would no longer be supported
properly or positioned to provide its intended
benefit. That could cause serious or even fatal
injuries.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 48
48 Occupant safety
X For safety, make sure hook ; is attached Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
to anchorage ring : beyond the safety and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
catch, as illustrated. belt system. Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Once hook ; is attached, the child restraint
itself can be secured.
Safety and security
X Install the child restraint system and

tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
G Warning!
Only use the described top tether anchorage
rings for the respective child seat. Other
lashing eyelets could tear in case of an
accident. Make sure the top tether straps are LATCH-type anchors : are located between
not crossed or twisted and the hook is
the seat cushion and the backrest.
attached and closed properly.
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type A rigid connection between the child seat
G Observe Safety notes, see page 44. and the body of the vehicle is established.
X Make sure the seat belt for the rear center
G Warning!
seat can operate freely with a child seat
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
installed.
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. Child safety
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve Child safety locks
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where G Observe Safety notes, see page 44.
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a G Warning!
booster.
Children could open a rear door from the
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s inside. This may cause serious personal injury
instructions. or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear
The child seat must be firmly attached to the doors with the child safety locks whenever
right and left side anchors. children are riding in the back seats of the
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come vehicle.
loose during an accident which could result in
The child safety locks on the rear doors
serious injury or death to the child.
enable you to secure each rear door
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or individually. You cannot open a secured rear
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced. door from the inside. You can open the rear
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH-type door from the outside when the vehicle is
anchors (at each of the rear outer seats) for unlocked.
the installation of a LATCH-type child seat
with matching mounting fittings.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 49
Panic alarm 49
The rear door windows can no longer be

operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
It is still possible to operate the rear door
windows using the switches located on the
Safety and security

door control panel of the driver’s door.
X Deactivating: Slide override switch : to
the left.
The rear door windows can again be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
X Securing: Press the lever up in direction of
For more information on power windows, see
arrow :.
the “Controls in detail” section
X Check to make sure the child safety locks (Y page 81).
are working properly.
X Releasing: Press the lever down in
direction of arrow ;. Panic alarm
Override switch
With the override switch you can disable the
rear door window switches in the rear door
panels.
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
window opening. X Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing turn signal
lamps will operate briefly.
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
X Activating: Slide override switch : to the interference, and
right.
Symbol # becomes visible. 2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 50
50 Driving safety systems
interference that may cause undesired Safety notes

operation.
G Warning!
Any unauthorized modification to this
The following factors increase the risk of
device could void the user’s authority to
accidents:
operate the equipment.
Safety and security
RExcessive speed, especially in turns

i Canada only: RWet and slippery road surfaces
This device complies with RSS-210 of
RFollowing another vehicle too closely
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: The driving safety systems described in this
1. This device may not cause interference, section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
and the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
2. this device must accept any steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
interference received, including the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
interference that may cause undesired or the traction afforded.
operation of the device.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
Any unauthorized modification to this prevent accidents.
device could void the user’s authority to The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the
operate the equipment. driving safety systems described in this
section must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
Driving safety systems the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Introduction Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
This section contains information about the
keep a safe distance to other road users and
following driving safety systems:
objects on the street.
RABS (Antilock Brake System) If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
RBAS (Brake Assist System) safety systems may also switch off. Observe
REBB
indicator and warning lamps that may come
(Electronic Brake Booster)
on as well as messages in the multifunction
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) display that may appear.
i In winter operation, the maximum G Warning!
effectiveness of most of the driving
The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® switch off
systems described in this section is only
when the differential locks are switched on.
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains
When the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® are
as required.
switched off
Rwheels may lock during hard braking
Rsteering capabilities are reduced
Rbraking distance is increased
Rvehiclestability in standard driving
maneuvers is increased
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 51
Driving safety systems 51
Make sure the differential locks are switched functions as a reminder to take extra care
on at all times except when driving off-road while driving.
for example. Switch on the differential locks
immediately when returning from off-road Emergency brake maneuver
driving. X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
Safety and security

pedal.
ABS G Warning!
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also
G Warning! switched off. Observe indicator and warning
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady lamps that may come on as well as messages
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the in the multifunction display that may appear.
brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
and significantly reduces braking during hard braking, reducing steering
effectiveness. capability and extending the braking distance.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not LOW-RANGE ABS
lock during braking. This allows you to During off-road driving, a special low-range
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. system for the ABS is operational with the
The ABS is functional above a speed of transfer case in position LOW (Y page 91).
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent An improved braking action (dig-in effect) is
of road surface conditions, provided the obtained for vehicles speeds of up to 37 mph
differential locks are not engaged. (60 km/h) through a change in the ABS
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will control function.
respond even to light brake pressure.
The ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the BAS
ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
Braking
very quickly, the BAS automatically provides
At the instant one of the wheels is about to full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the the braking distance.
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
regulating mode. the emergency braking situation is over.
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake The ABS will prevent the wheels from
pedal while you feel the pulsation. locking.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
yields the advantages provided by the ABS, function again as normal. The BAS is then
namely braking power and the ability to steer deactivated.
the vehicle.
G Warning!
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions, but without the additional brake
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 52
52 Driving safety systems
boost available that the BAS would normally The ESP® warning lamp d in the
provide in an emergency braking maneuver. instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
Therefore, the braking distance may increase. engaged.
G Warning!
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
Safety and security
EBB
ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 50. instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
The Electronic Brake Booster (EBB) enhances follows:
braking effectiveness by allowing the rear RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the possible.
braking effort in straight-line braking without
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
a loss of vehicle stability.
pedal.
G Warning! RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
If the EBB malfunctions, the brake system is prevailing road conditions.
still functioning. However, the rear wheels
may lock up during hard braking. You may to Failure to observe these guidelines could
lose control over the vehicle and possibly cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
cause an accident. Adjust your driving style to prevent accidents resulting from excessive
the non-operating status of the EBB. speed.
! Only conduct operational or performance

ESP® tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
G Observe Safety notes, see page 50. Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is otherwise seriously damage the brake
operational as soon as the engine is running system or the transfer case which is not
and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
adhesive friction between the tires and the Warranty.
road surface) and handling.
! Because the ESP® operates
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is automatically, the engine and ignition must
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
applying brakes to individual wheels and by position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
limiting the engine output, the ESP® works to being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially Such testing should be no longer than 10
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery seconds.
road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the Active braking action through the ESP®
vehicle during braking and steering may otherwise seriously damage the brake
maneuvers. system which is not covered by the
The ESP® warning lamp d in the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine ! The ESP® will only function properly if you
is running. use wheels of the recommended tire size
as specified in the “Technical data” section
of this Operator’s Manual.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 53
Driving safety systems 53
When you switch off the ESP®,

Electronic Traction System (4-ETS) Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
G Observe Safety notes, see page 50. Rthe engine output is not limited, which
The 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
System) is a component of the ESP®. The into surfaces for better grip
Safety and security

4-ETS improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
available traction, especially under slippery are braking
road conditions by applying the brakes to a
Rthe 4-ETS will still apply the brakes to a
spinning wheel. In addition, more power is
transferred to the wheel(s) with traction. spinning wheel at vehicle speeds up to
approximately 37 mph (60 km/h)
The 4-ETS function is available between
vehicle speeds of 0 mph (km/h) and 37 mph Rthe cruise control cannot be activated
(60 km/h). Rthe cruise control switches off if activated
When you switch off the ESP®, the 4-ETS is
still enabled. i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp d in the instrument
Switching off the ESP®
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
G Warning! then not stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
i When the ESP® is switched off, it will be
circumstances described below. Disabling switched on again automatically when
the system will reduce vehicle stability in exceeding a vehicle speed of 37 mph (60
driving maneuvers. km/h) or exceeding a severity threshold of
side acceleration.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP® in driving situations in which it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
Rwhen driving with snow chains
Rin deep snow
Rin sand or gravel
Rwhen driving off-road
G Warning!
X With the engine running, press ESP®
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
switch : until the ESP® warning lamp
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
d in the instrument cluster comes on.
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid The ESP® is switched off.
or a wheel is spinning.
G Warning!
When the ESP® warning lamp d is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 54
54 Anti-theft systems
switched off or is not operational due to a Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions and to the non-operating Anti-theft alarm system
Safety and security
status of the ESP®. Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an someone opens
extended period with the ESP® switched Ra door
off. This may cause serious damage to the Rthe tailgate
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Rthe hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
Switching on the ESP® element (a door, for example) is immediately
X
closed.
Press ESP® switch : until the ESP®
warning lamp d in the instrument The alarm system will also be triggered when
cluster goes out. Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
You are now again in normal driving mode key
with the ESP® switched on. Ra door is opened from the inside
Rthe tailgate is opened from the inside
Anti-theft systems To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
Immobilizer (Y page 55).
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Activating
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
Deactivating SmartKey.
X Switch on the ignition. The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
i Starting the engine will also deactivate lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
the immobilizer. system is armed.
In the event that the engine cannot be
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
charged), the system is not operational.
properly closed.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 55
Anti-theft systems 55
Close the respective element. X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the switch.
SmartKey. X Press tow-away alarm switch :.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate Indicator lamp ; comes on briefly.
that the alarm system is disarmed. X Exit and lock the vehicle.
Safety and security

i The vehicle will lock and the alarm system The tow-away alarm remains disabled until
will rearm automatically again after you lock the vehicle again.
approximately 40 seconds unless you open
a door or the tailgate.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Tow-away alarm
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual X Press button % or & on the
and audible alarm will be triggered when SmartKey.
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
(Y page 55).
X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm is armed after about
30 seconds automatically.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until
you lock the vehicle again.
Disabling tow-away alarm

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
disable the tow-away alarm feature before
towing the vehicle, or when parking on a
surface subject to movement, such as a ferry
or auto train.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 56
56
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 57
57
Vehicle equipment .............................. 58

Locking and unlocking ....................... 58
Starter switch positions ..................... 62
Seats .................................................... 62
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 67
Mirrors ................................................. 69
Memory function ................................. 70
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 72
Wipers .................................................. 79
Power windows ................................... 81
Driving and parking ............................ 82
Automatic transmission ..................... 87
Transfer case ....................................... 91
Differential locks ................................. 93
Instrument cluster .............................. 95
Control system .................................... 97
Driving systems ................................ 112
Climate control system .................... 119
Front windshield defroster .............. 124
Rear window defroster ..................... 125
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 125
Loading and storing .......................... 126
Useful features ................................. 131
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 58
58 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
features, standard or optional, potentially removable mechanical key.
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rthe doors
features described in this manual. Rthe tailgate
Controls in detail
Rthe fuel filler flap

Locking and unlocking
Notes
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system
is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm : & Lock button
system is armed.
; % Unlock button
All doors, the hood and the tailgate must be
= Battery check lamp
closed.
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle i USA only:
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the This device complies with Part 15 of the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is following two conditions:
drained. 1. This device may not cause harmful
RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and interference, and
replace them if necessary. 2. this device must accept any
RUse the mechanical key to unlock the interference received, including
driver’s door and the tailgate. interference that may cause undesired
RUse the mechanical key to lock the operation.
vehicle. Any unauthorized modification to this
RHave the vehicle battery and the vehicle device could void the user’s authority to
battery connections checked at an operate the equipment.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 59
Locking and unlocking 59
i Canada only: Checking SmartKey batteries

This device complies with RSS-210 of
X Press button & or % on the
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: SmartKey.
Battery check lamp = (Y page 58) comes
1. This device may not cause interference, on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
and batteries are in order.
2. this device must accept any If the battery check lamp does not come on
Controls in detail
interference received, including briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
interference that may cause undesired are discharged.
operation of the device. X Replace the batteries (Y page 225).
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to i You can obtain the required batteries at
operate the equipment. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal

Factory setting
range of the vehicle, pressing button
X Global unlocking: Press button %. & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
The vehicle will lock again automatically accordingly.
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if neither door nor tailgate is Loss of the SmartKey
opened.
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
X Global locking: Press button &. you should do the following:
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
Selective setting authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing mechanical key to your car insurance
button % will then only unlock the driver’s company immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
door and the fuel filler flap.
necessary.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
% and & simultaneously for Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
approximately 6 seconds until battery
check lamp = (Y page 58) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows: Opening the doors from the inside
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
You can open a locked door from the inside.
flap: Press button % once.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
X Global unlocking: Press button % do so.
twice.
X Global locking: Press button &.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 60
60 Locking and unlocking
You can deactivate the automatic central

locking using the control system
(Y page 108).
Locking and unlocking from the inside

Controls in detail
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside

using the central locking switches. This can
be useful, for example, if you want to lock the
Example illustration driver’s door vehicle before starting to drive.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with The central locking switches do not lock or
the SmartKey, opening a door or the tailgate unlock the fuel filler flap.
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 55).
X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
move up.
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
X Pull on the inside door handle on the
respective rear door.
X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.
When all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks.
Automatic central locking
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically switch :.
when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can open a locked door from inside at any
You can open a locked door from the inside. time. Open door only when conditions are
Open door only when conditions are safe to safe to do so.
do so.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
The doors and the tailgate are designed to central locking switch
unlock automatically after an accident if the
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
force of the impact exceeds a preset
threshold. the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
front door is opened from the inside
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
turning at vehicle speeds of above 9 mph settings, only the front door opened from
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself the inside is unlocked
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is If the vehicle was previously locked centrally
on a test stand. with the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the
central unlocking switch.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 61
Locking and unlocking 61
Tailgate To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not

place the SmartKey in the cargo
G Warning! compartment.
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among Opening the tailgate from the inside
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
The tailgate swings open to one side. Always
make sure there is sufficient clearance for the
tailgate.
engine is running and while driving. Among
X Pull on inside door handle ;.
If the door was locked:
Opening the tailgate from the outside X Pull up locking knob :.
X Pull on inside door handle ;.
Separately locking and unlocking the

tailgate
To deny any unauthorized person access to
the tailgate, lock it separately with the
mechanical key.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 58).

X Press lock cylinder : and pull on
handle ;.
X Open the tailgate to the side.
Closing the tailgate from the outside

X Locking: Close the tailgate.
G Warning! X Remove the mechanical key from the
To prevent possible personal injury, always SmartKey (Y page 221).
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 62
62 Seats
X Insert the mechanical key in the lock When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
cylinder. (except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
position 2 and remove the mechanical signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
key in that position to lock the tailgate. instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
The tailgate remains locked even when the instrument cluster fails to come on when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked. ignition is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
You can only cancel the separate tailgate
Controls in detail
instrument cluster remains on after starting

locking mode by means of the mechanical the engine or comes on while driving, refer to
key. “Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 213).
X Unlocking: Remove the mechanical key
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
from the SmartKey (Y page 221). position 0 for an extended period of time, it
X Insert the mechanical key in the lock can no longer be turned in the starter switch.
cylinder. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise remove SmartKey from the starter switch and
to neutral position 1 and remove the reinsert.
mechanical key in that position to unlock The steering is locked when the SmartKey is
the tailgate. removed from the starter switch.
You can now open the tailgate.
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not
be sufficiently charged.
Starter switch positions RCheck the vehicle battery and charge it
SmartKey if necessary.
RGet a jump start.
Always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation. This will help to prevent
accelerated vehicle battery discharge or a
completely discharged vehicle battery.
Seats
Safety notes
G Warning!
Starter switch In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
g For removing SmartKey (gear selector control, all seat, head restraint, steering
lever must be in park position P) wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
1 Power supply for some electrical well as fastening of seat belts, must be done
consumers, e.g. radio before the vehicle is put into motion.
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 63
Seats 63
G Warning! children be placed in the rear seats whenever

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. possible. Regardless of seating position,
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause children 12 years old and under must be
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. seated and properly secured in an
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
backrest in an excessively reclined position as restraint, or booster seat recommended for
this can be dangerous. You could slide under the size and weight of the child. For additional
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
Controls in detail
it, the seat belt would apply force at the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious significantly increased if the child restraints
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
belts provide the best restraint when the or the child is not properly secured in the child
wearer is in a position that is as upright as restraint.
possible and seat belts are properly
positioned on the body. G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
G Warning! positioned head restraints.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
correctly fasten your seat belt. to the head as possible and the center of the
Observe the following points: head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
slightly angled when holding the steering
accident or similar situation.
wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating restraints. Head restraints are intended to
position that still allows you to reach the help reduce injuries during an accident.
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
Seat adjustment
controls properly.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as ! When moving the seats, make sure
close to the head as possible and the center Rthere are no items in the footwell or
of the head restraint supports the back of behind the seat
the head at eye level. Rthe cup holder next to the armrest is
RNever place hands under the seat or near removed
any moving parts while a seat is being Rthe cup holder in the front passenger
adjusted.
footwell is folded closed
Failure to do so could result in an accident
Otherwise, you could damage the seats.
and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning! Power seats

According to accident statistics, children are i The memory function (Y page 70) lets
safer when properly restrained in the rear you store the settings for the seat position
seating positions than in the front seating together with the settings for the steering
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 64
64 Seats
X Switch on the ignition. Removing and installing front seat head

or restraints
X Open the respective door. i Tilt the seat backrest rearward for easier
removal and installation of the head
restraints.
Controls in detail
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the

switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow =. X Removing: Press switch : upwards and
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch hold until the head restraint is fully
forward or backward in direction of extended.
arrow ;. X Pull out the head restraint with both hands.
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down X Installing: Press switch : upwards and
in direction of arrow A. hold for about 5 seconds.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or X Insert the head restraint into openings on
down in direction of arrow ? until your the seat backrest.
upper legs are lightly supported.
X Head restraint height: Press the switch
i The guide bar with the detent must be on
up or down in direction of arrow :. the left.
X Push the head restraint down until it
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment engages.
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position.
Rear seat head restraints

G Warning!
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear
head restraints in the upright position when
the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear of
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
position by pushing or pulling on the upper folding operation of the head restraints.
edge of the head restraint cushion.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 65
Seats 65
G Warning! Rear seat head restraints, removing

For your protection, drive only with properly and installing
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
Controls in detail
event of an accident or similar situation.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head X Removing: Pull out the head restraint with
restraints installed when the rear seats are both hands.
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
i The head restraint(s) should be stored in
help reduce injuries during an accident.
a secure place.
Rear seat head restraint height X Installing: Insert the head restraint into
adjustment openings on the seat backrest.
X Push the head restraint down to the stop.
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position.
Multicontour seat
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into
the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion depth, seat backrest
X Raising: Pull head restraint upward to the cushion-height and curvature can be
desired position. continuously varied with switches on the
X Lowering: Push head restraint downward inside of each front seat when the ignition is
to the desired position. switched on.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 66
66 Seats
Three blue indicator lamps in the switch

come on.
X Press seat ventilation switch : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat heating
Controls in detail
switches off automatically.
X Switch on the ignition.

Seat heating
X Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper
leg using switch :. Front seat heating
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired
position using switches ; and =.
X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
side bolsters so that they provide good
lateral support using switch ?.
Seat ventilation
The red indicator lamps in the switch come

on to show which heating level you have
selected.
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
The seat heating switches off automatically
from level 1 after approximately 20 minutes.
The blue indicator lamps in seat ventilation X Switch on the ignition.
switch : come on to show which ventilation X Switching on: Press seat heating
level you have selected. switch :.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat Three red indicator lamps in the switch
can be activated using the summer opening come on.
feature (Y page 82). X Continue pressing seat heating switch :
until desired seat heating level is reached.
X Switching off: Press seat heating
X Switching on: Press seat ventilation
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
switch :.
lamps go out.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 67
Multifunction steering wheel 67
If one or more of the indicator lamps in If one or both of the indicator lamps in the
respective seat heating button : are seat heating switch are flashing, there is
flashing, there is insufficient voltage available insufficient voltage available since too many
since too many electrical consumers are electrical consumers are turned on. The seat
turned on. The seat heating switches off heating switches off automatically.
automatically. The seat heating will switch back on again
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
available.
Rear seat heating Multifunction steering wheel

Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving
could cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can be
operated when the driver’s door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
: Normal heating vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
; Rapid heating vehicle could result in an accident and/or
The red indicator lamps in the switch come serious personal injury.
on to show which heating level you have Make sure
selected.
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
The seat heating switches from level 2 (rapid
arms slightly bent at the elbows
seat heating) to level 1 (normal seat heating)
Ryou can move your legs freely
after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches off automatically Rall displays (including malfunction and
from level 1 after approximately 30 minutes. indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
X Switch on the ignition. are clearly visible
X Switching on seat heating: Press upper
switch position :.
A red indicator lamp in the switch comes
on.
X Switching off seat heating: Press upper
switch position : once more.
X Switching on rapid seat heating: Press
lower switch position ;.
Both red indicator lamps in the switch
come on.
X Switching off rapid seat heating: Press
lower switch position ; once more.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 68
68 Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel adjustment To stop steering wheel movement do one of

the following:
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress one of the memory position buttons.
RPress the memory button.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Controls in detail
Children could open the driver’s door and

unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
X Switch on the ignition. With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
or the steering wheel will return to its last set
X Open the driver’s door. position when you close the driver’s door with
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
stalk in direction of arrows :. will also return to its last set position when
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;. switch with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
i The memory function (Y page 70) lets stored when the ignition is switched off or
you store the settings for the steering the position is stored in memory
wheel together with the settings for the (Y page 71).
seat position and the exterior rear view
mirrors. With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Easy-entry/exit feature The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
This feature allows the driver an easier entry in starter switch position 0 or 1.
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is i When the current position for the steering
in its uppermost position. wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated steering wheel will no longer be able to
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu
feature is activated.
of the control system (Y page 108).
The adjustment procedure is briefly
G Warning! interrupted when the engine is started.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering G Warning!
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is Let the system complete the adjustment
activated. procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 69
Mirrors 69
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose For more information on the steering wheel,
control of the vehicle. see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 97).
Heated steering wheel

Mirrors
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel. Notes
Controls in detail
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirror

X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually.
Exterior rear view mirrors

X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the G Warning!
stalk in direction of arrow :. Exercise care when using the passenger-side
Indicator lamp = comes on. exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
i The steering wheel heating may be wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
suspended temporarily. However, indicator closer than they appear. Check your interior
lamp = remains on. The steering wheel rear view mirror and glance over your
heating is suspended when the shoulder before changing lanes.
temperature of the vehicle interior is above
86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
temperature of the steering wheel is above
95‡ (35†).
When these conditions do not apply
anymore, steering wheel heating
continues.
X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in direction of arrow ;.
Indicator lamp = goes out.
i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
case of power surge or undervoltage or if
X Press button = for the driver’s side
the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
exterior rear view mirror or button ; for
i The steering wheel heating switches off the passenger-side exterior rear view
automatically when you remove the mirror.
SmartKey from the starter switch.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 70
70 Memory function
X Press adjustment button : up, down, left

or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
Controls in detail
automatically.
X Make sure you have stored a parking

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
position for the passenger-side exterior
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s rear view mirror (Y page 71).
side and the interior rear view mirror will X Switch on the ignition.
respond automatically to glare when the
X Press button ; for the passenger-side
ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the exterior rear view mirror.
interior rear view mirror. X Shift the automatic transmission into
The rear view mirrors will not react if the reverse gear R.
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear The passenger-side exterior rear view
R or the interior lighting is switched on. mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
G Warning! The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
The auto-dimming function does not react if previously stored driving position
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors R10 seconds after you have put the gear
in the interior rear view mirror.
selector lever out of position reverse gear
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior R
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
react, for example, when transporting cargo
which covers the rear window. speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
Rimmediately when you press button : for
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
you may not be able to observe traffic
conditions and could cause an accident.
Memory function
Notes
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
This feature is only available in Canada
seat.
vehicles.
Each memory position button on the driver’s
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
side can store all of the following settings:
parking position so that the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror will be turned RSeat position
downward to the stored position. RMulticontour seat: previously saved setting
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 71
Memory function 71
RSteering wheel position Recalling positions from memory

RExterior rear view mirrors’ position X Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has
G Warning!
completely moved to the stored position.
Do not activate the memory function while On the driver’s side, also wait for the
driving. Activating the memory function while steering wheel and exterior rear view
driving could cause the driver to lose control mirrors to move to the stored position.
of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
i Releasing the memory position button
Each memory position button on the front stops movement to the stored positions
passenger side can store all of the following immediately.
settings:
RSeat position
RMulticontour seat: previously saved setting Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles.
For easier parking, you can adjust the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as soon
as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see (Y page 70).
Storing positions into memory

X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, additionally adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button ;.
X Press memory button ; once and within
3 seconds press one memory position X Stop the vehicle.
button : 1, 2 or 3. X Switch on the ignition.
All settings are stored to the selected X Press button =.
position. The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror with adjustment button : so
that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 72
72 Lighting
X Press memory button ?. 7 N Front fog lamps

X Within 3 seconds, press bottom of 8 R Rear fog lamp
adjustment button :.
The parking position is stored if the mirror i If you hear a warning signal you have
does not move. forgotten to switch off the low-beam
headlamps or the parking lamps before
i If the mirror does move, repeat the above opening the driver’s door.
steps. After the setting is stored, you can
In addition, the message Switch Off
Controls in detail
move the mirror again.

Lights appears in the multifunction
display.
Lighting Switch off the low-beam headlamps or the
parking lamps.
Notes If the message Turn off lights or
i If you drive in countries where vehicles remove key appears in the multifunction
drive on the other side of the road than the display remove the SmartKey from the
country where the vehicle is registered, you starter switch or switch off the headlamps.
must have the headlamps modified for
! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps
symmetrical low beams. Relevant
information can be obtained at any when leaving the vehicle may result in a
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. discharged battery.
Low-beam headlamps
Exterior lamp switch The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
and off with the exterior lamp switch.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position L.
The following lamps come on:
RLow-beam headlamps
RTail lamps
RParking lamps
RLicense plate lamps
RSide marker lamps
1 W Standing lamps, left RInstrument panel lamps
2 X Standing lamps, right
RGreen indicator lamp L in the
3 $ Off
instrument cluster
Daytime running lamp mode
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode switch to position $.
5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 73
Lighting 73
Automatic headlamp mode Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only

available with the exterior lamp switch in
The following lamps come on and go out
position L.
automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
Daytime running lamp mode
RLow-beam headlamps
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
RTail lamps mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
RParking lamps
Controls in detail
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode
RLicense plate lamps is deactivated by default.
RSide marker lamps X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
using the control system, see “Setting
G Warning! daytime running lamp mode (USA only)”
If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the (Y page 106).
headlamps will not automatically come on X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
under foggy conditions. $ or Ã.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate When the engine is running, the low-beam
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to headlamps come on.
L when driving or when traffic and/or In low ambient lighting conditions, the
ambient lighting conditions require you to do following lamps will come on additionally:
so. RTail lamps
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
RParking lamps
from position Ã to L with the vehicle
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching RLicense plate lamps
from Ã to L will briefly switch off the RSide marker lamps
headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an With the daytime running lamp mode
accident. activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
to the driver. The driver is responsible for the Canada only
operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times. With the exterior lamp switch in position
$ or Ã, you cannot switch on the high-
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp beam headlamps.
switch to position Ã.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
The following lamps come on and go out
X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
depending on the brightness of the ambient
light with the SmartKey in starter switch switch to position L to permit activation
position 1: of the high-beam headlamps.
Rtail
When the engine is running, and you
lamps
Rshift from a driving position to neutral
Rparking lamps
position N or park position P with the
Rlicense plate lamps vehicle at a standstill, the low-beam
Rside marker lamps headlamps will go out with a delay of
3 minutes
When the engine is running, the low-beam
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
headlamps will also come on and turn off
automatically. T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 74
74 Lighting
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
and the side marker lamps come on regarding permissible lamp operation.
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
L, the manual headlamp mode has T or L (Y page 72).
priority over the daytime running lamp X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
mode exterior lamp switch to first stop.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on The green indicator lamp N in the
(Y page 72). exterior lamp switch comes on.
Controls in detail
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the

USA only exterior lamp switch to second stop.
In high ambient lighting conditions you can The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps and
switch on the high-beam headlamps with the the yellow indicator lamp R in the
exterior lamp switch in position L. exterior lamp switch come on.
In low ambient lighting conditions you can X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
switch on the high-beam headlamps with the lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
exterior lamp switch in position $, Ã its stop.
or L.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. Locator lighting and night security
X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp illumination
switch to position L to permit activation
Locator lighting and night security
of the high-beam headlamps.
illumination are described in the “Control
When the engine is running, and you turn the system” section, see “Setting locator
exterior lamp switch to position T or lighting” (Y page 106) and “Setting night
L, the manual headlamp mode has security illumination (Headlamps delayed
priority over the daytime running lamp mode. shut-off feature)” (Y page 107).
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 72).
Combination switch
Fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position Ã.
G Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position Ã to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from Ã to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps

and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 75
Lighting 75
High beam Hazard warning flasher

X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position The hazard warning flasher can be switched
L (Y page 72). on at all times, even with the SmartKey
X Switching on: Push the combination removed from the starter switch.
switch in direction of arrow :. The hazard warning flasher comes on
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp automatically when an air bag deploys.
K in the instrument cluster comes on.
Controls in detail
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow ; to its original
position.
High-beam flasher
X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow ;.
Turn signals
X Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch :.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signals will operate when the
ignition is switched on.
X Switching off: Press hazard warning
flasher switch : again.
X Press the combination switch in direction i If the hazard warning flasher has been
of arrow : or ;. activated automatically, press hazard
The corresponding turn signal indicator warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
lamp ! or # in the instrument
cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automatically Headlamp cleaning system
after major steering wheel movements.
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press combination
switch only to point of resistance and
release. The corresponding turn signal
lamps will flash three times.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 76
76 Lighting
X Switch on the ignition. front fog lamp comes on on the side of the
X Press headlamp cleaning button :. turn signal.
The headlamps are cleaned with a high- or
pressure water jet. X Turn steering wheel in the desired
The headlamps will be cleaned automatically direction.
when you have Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
Rswitched side of your steering direction comes on.
on the headlamps
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
Controls in detail
and
opposite to your steering direction comes
Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the on.
windshield with washer fluid fifteen times The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
For information on filling up the washer come on automatically depending on the
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp steering angle, even if you did not switch on
cleaning system” (Y page 153). either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
will also go out automatically depending on
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps the steering angle and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the temporarily come on on both sides of the
direction into which you are turning. vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
direction and then again in the other direction
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
shortly thereafter.
only operate
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
Rin low ambient lighting conditions remains lit for a short time only. It then goes
Rat vehicle speeds below 25 mph out automatically.
(40 km/h)
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off Switching off
Rwhen the engine is running X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
or
Switching on X Steer straight ahead.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position i There may be a brief delay before the
L or Ã. corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
or
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 73).
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
other direction, the corner-illuminating
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 77
Lighting 77
Interior lighting in the front X Deactivating: Press symbol y on

rocker switch A.
The interior lighting controls are located in
the overhead control panel.
Manual control
! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
Controls in detail
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
X Switching on interior lighting: Press
symbol c on rocker switch A.
X Switching off interior lighting: Press
: Left reading lamp
rocker switch A to center position to
; p Left reading lamp on/off activate the automatic control.
= Right reading lamp
X Switching on/off front reading lamps:
? p Right reading lamp on/off Press respective button p.
A Rocker switch for automatic control and
manual control
B Interior lamp Interior lighting in the rear
Automatic control ! An interior lamp switched on manually

does not go out automatically.
X Activating: Press rocker switch A to Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
center position. extended period of time with the engine
The interior lighting (except cargo turned off could result in a discharged
compartment lamps) comes on in battery.
darkness, when you
Runlock the vehicle
The rear interior lamp is located above the
rear seat bench.
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
Ropen a front door (the interior lighting in
the front comes on)
Ropen a rear door (the interior lighting in
the rear comes on)
The interior lighting goes out after a short
time (Y page 108).
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
go out automatically after a few minutes
: Left reading lamp
when the SmartKey is removed.
; Rear interior lamp
= Right reading lamp
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 78
78 Lighting
? p Right rear reading lamp on/off Cargo compartment lamps

A p Left rear reading lamp on/off The switch for the cargo compartment lamps
and the rear interior lamp is located in the
Reading lamps overhead control panel.
X Switching on/off: Press respective
reading lamp switch p.
Controls in detail
Switching rear interior lamp on/off

manually
The switch for the rear interior lamp and the
cargo compartment lamps is located in the
overhead control panel.
The cargo compartment lamps are located

above the rear window.
X Switching rear interior lamp on/off:

Press switch :.
The cargo compartment lamps will also
come on and off.
X Switching cargo compartment
Switching rear interior lamp on/off lamps ; on/off: Press switch :.
automatically i When opening the tailgate, cargo
The rear interior lamp switches on and off compartment lamps ; come on
automatically when the automatic control is automatically. Switching off the cargo
switched on (Y page 77) and a rear door is compartment lamps using switch : in the
opened or closed. overhead control panel then is not
i The rear interior lamp cannot be switched possible.
off with switch : (Y page 78) located in You can switch off cargo compartment
lamps ; if the tailgate should remain open
the front overhead control panel.
for a longer period of time, see “Switching
cargo compartment lamps off and on with
the tailgate open” (Y page 79).
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 79
Wipers 79
Switching cargo compartment lamps Switching on

off and on with the tailgate open X Press lock cylinder ; to activate the cargo
G Warning! compartment lamps again.

The cargo compartment lamps will come
To prevent possible personal injury, always
on.
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
Wipers
Controls in detail
children are around.
Notes
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the ! Do not operate the wipers when the
engine is running and while driving. Among windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) accumulates on a windshield/rear window
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in might scratch the glass and/or damage the
unconsciousness and death. wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary
! To prevent the vehicle battery from being to operate the wipers in dry weather
discharged, switch off the cargo conditions, always operate the wipers with
compartment lamps if the tailgate should washer fluid.
remain open for a longer period of time.
Combination switch
: Single wipe
Switching off
Wiping with washer fluid
X Open the tailgate (Y page 61).
; Switching on windshield wipers
X Press door lock : down in direction of
arrow until it engages. X Switch on the ignition.
! Do not close the tailgate if the lock is

engaged in down position. The lock could Windshield wipers
otherwise be damaged.
When locking the tailgate, it is important Switching on/off
that the door lock be in the same original
position as shown in the illustration. 0 Windshield wipers off
To return door lock : to its original
I Intermittent wiping
position, press lock cylinder ;.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 80
80 Wipers
II Normal wiper speed or

Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
III Fast wiper speed combination switch
X Turn the combination switch in direction of Single wipe

arrow ; to the desired position,
X Press the combination switch briefly in
depending on the intensity of the rain.
direction of arrow : to the resistance
Controls in detail
point.
Intermittent wiping The windshield wipers wipe one time
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet without washer fluid.
weather conditions or in the presence of
precipitation. Wiping with washer fluid
When you select intermittent wiping, the rain X Press the combination switch in direction
sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
of arrow : past the resistance point.
suitable wiping interval depending on the
The windshield wipers operate with washer
wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
fluid.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
intermittent setting when the vehicle is i To prevent smears on the windshield or
taken to an automatic car wash or during noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will washer fluid every now and then even when
operate in the presence of water sprayed it is raining.
on the windshield, and windshield wipers For information on filling up the washer
may be damaged as a result. reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 153).
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on For information on cleaning the headlamps
the surface of the rain sensor or optical with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
effects may cause the windshield wipers to system” (Y page 75).
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should Rear window wiper/washer
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry. The rear window wiper engages automatically
when the automatic transmission is shifted
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on
into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
wetness of windshield. After the initial wipe,
switched on.
pauses between wipes are controlled by the
rain sensor automatically.
X Turn the combination switch to position I.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 81
Power windows 81
X Switch on the ignition. Power windows

X Activating intermittent wiping: Press Opening and closing
switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all door windows
X Deactivating intermittent wiping: Press
are located on the driver’s door control panel.
switch : again.
The switches for the respective door windows
Indicator lamp ; goes out. are located on the front passenger door and
Controls in detail
X Wiping with washer fluid: Press and hold on the rear doors.
switch =.
i Operating the rear door windows from
The rear window is wiped for another
5 seconds after switch = is released. the rear is not possible when you activate
the override switch (Y page 49).
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp G Observe Safety notes, see page 44.
cleaning system” (Y page 153).
G Warning!
When closing the door windows, make sure
Problems with wipers there is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure.
! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves, Activate the override switch when children
snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a children may otherwise injure themselves,
safe location, and e.g. by becoming trapped in the window
R- remove the SmartKey from the starter opening.
switch The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or
- engage the parking brake
by releasing button & on the SmartKey.
before attempting to remove any
blockage. G Warning!
RRemove blockage. Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
RTurn the wipers on again. downward motion of the pane may pull that
If the windshield wipers fail to function at part of your body down between the window
all with the combination switch in position pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
I, there is a risk of entrapment, release the
Rset the combination switch to the next switch and pull it to close the window.
higher wiper speed
i You can also open or close the windows
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at
using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
feature” (Y page 82) and “Convenience
Center
closing feature” (Y page 82).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 82
82 Driving and parking
sliding sunroof have reached the desired

position.
The vehicle unlocks.
X Release button % on the SmartKey to
interrupt the opening procedure.
Convenience closing feature

Controls in detail
When locking the vehicle, you can

simultaneously close the windows and the
: Override switch (Y page 49) tilt/sliding sunroof.
; Left front door window
G Warning!
= Right front door window
When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding
? Right rear door window sunroof, make sure there is no danger of
A Left rear door window anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
RRelease button & to stop the closing
switch ; to A to the resistance point.
The corresponding door window will move procedure. To open, press and hold button
downwards or upwards until you release %. To continue the closing procedure
the switch. after making sure that there is no danger of
X Express opening: Press switch ; to A
anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure, press and hold button &.
past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding door window opens
completely. The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
X Stopping during express opening: Press
the driver’s outside door handle.
or pull the respective switch again. X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle.
X Press and hold button & on the
Summer opening feature SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof are completely closed.
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
the vehicle before driving off by
simultaneously interrupt the closing procedure.
Ropening the windows
Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof Driving and parking
The summer opening feature can only be
Safety notes
activated via the remote control of the
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close G Warning!
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle. Make sure absolutely no objects are
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
driver’s outside door handle. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
X Press and hold button % on the obstacles. If there are any floormats or
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 83
Driving and parking 83
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals Automatic transmission

still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
effort is necessary to brake and steer the j Park position with gear selector lever lock
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. k Reverse gear
i Neutral position
h Drive position
Starting the engine
For more information, see “Automatic
G Warning! transmission” (Y page 87).
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon park position P.
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Starting
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
entering the vehicle while driving, have the position 3 (Y page 62) and release it.
cause determined and corrected The engine starts automatically.
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one Starting difficulties
window fully open at all times.
! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the starter switch.
In this case, the steering is locked.
X To unlock, remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch and reinsert.
The engine does not start. You can hear

the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 84
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to driving off, you have forgotten to release
position 0 and repeat the starting the parking brake.
procedure. Release the parking brake.
If the engine does not start after several
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
starting attempts:
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance. Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
The engine does not start. You cannot ! Simultaneously depressing the
hear the starter. accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
The battery may not be sufficiently charged. reduces engine performance and causes
X Get a jump start (Y page 237). premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
If the engine will not start despite a jump Limited Warranty.
start:
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
Center or call Roadside Assistance. automatic central locking system engages
The starter has been exposed to excessive and the locking knobs in the doors move
temperatures. down.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
The automatic door lock feature can be
deactivated (Y page 108).
X Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after several Automatic transmission

starting attempts:
G Warning!
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
Driving off brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
G Warning! quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
something. Only shift into gear when the
order to obtain braking action. This could
engine is idling normally and when your right
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
! Do not run a cold engine at high engine reverse gear R or park position P when the
speeds. Running a cold engine at high vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
engine speeds may shorten the service life automatic transmission could be damaged.
of the engine. This is not covered by the X Depress the brake pedal.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The gear selector lever lock is released.
! If an acoustic warning sounds and the X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
message Release Parking Brake position D or reverse gear R.
appears in the multifunction display when
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 85
Driving and parking 85
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
park position P is only possible with the X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
brake pedal depressed. necessary (Y page 152).
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock. In case of accident
X Wait for the gear selection process to If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
complete before setting the vehicle in X Do not start the engine under any
Controls in detail
motion.
circumstances.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
X Release the brake pedal.
roadway.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission
If the extent of the damage cannot be
shifts at a higher engine revolution. This
determined:
allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
For more information on driving, see “Driving Center or call Roadside Assistance.
instructions” (Y page 176). If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
For information on off-road driving, see “Off- system, and engine mount can be
road driving” (Y page 179). determined:
X Start the engine in the usual manner.
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires Parking
RAn ignition cable may be damaged. G Warning!
RThe engine electronics may not be Do not park this vehicle in areas where
operating properly. combustible materials such as grass, hay or
RUnburned
leaves can come into contact with the hot
gasoline may have entered the
exhaust system. These materials could be
catalytic converter and damaged it.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
X Give very little gas. Vehicle movement can cause serious
X Have the problem checked at an authorized personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. the vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do
the following before turning off the engine and
The coolant temperature is above leaving the vehicle:
248‡ (120†) RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling REngage the parking brake.
the engine. RShift the automatic transmission into park
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon position P.
as possible. RSlowly release the brake pedal.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 86
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the instrument cluster goes out.
the starter switch. X Engaging: Pull up parking brake lever :
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the firmly.
vehicle when leaving. When the engine is running, the brake
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
Parking brake
comes on.
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock Turning off the engine
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
G Warning!
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s
brake lights do not light up when the parking Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
brake is engaged. has come to a complete stop. With the engine
not running, there is no power assistance for
G Warning! the brake and steering systems. In this case,
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the it is important to keep in mind that a
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with considerably higher degree of effort is
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
position P.
release the parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of park position X Engage the parking brake.
P, either of which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. i Always engage the parking brake in
addition to shifting the automatic
transmission into park position P.
When parked on an incline, also turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the automatic
X Releasing: Pull up slightly on parking brake transmission in park position P.
lever : and press release button ;.
X Push parking brake lever : down to its
original position.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning lamp
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 87
Automatic transmission 87
Automatic transmission Gear selector lever

Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 82).
G Warning!
Controls in detail
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
still have sufficient clearance.
j Park position with gear selector lever lock
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
k Reverse gear
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or i Neutral position
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and h Drive position
injury.
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
! Allow the engine to warm up under low
transmission out of park position P or neutral
load use. Do not place full load on the
position N if the engine speed is higher than
engine until the operating temperature has
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
been reached.
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
extended period when driving off on control of the vehicle and hit someone or
slippery road surfaces. something. Only shift into gear when the
This may cause serious damage to the engine is idling normally and when your right
engine and the drivetrain which is not foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. ! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
catalytic converter to heat up more quickly
to operating temperature. i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock.
i The current gear selector lever position

corresponds with the current transmission
position.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 88
88 Automatic transmission
The current transmission position P, R, N, Effect

or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 88). B Park position
Shift the automatic transmission
into park position P only when the
Shifting procedure vehicle is stopped. The park
The automatic transmission selects individual position is not intended to serve as
gears automatically, depending on: a brake when the vehicle is parked.
Controls in detail
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 89) Rather, the driver should always
engage the parking brake in
Rtransfer case position (HIGH or LOW) addition to shifting the automatic
(Y page 91) transmission into park position P to
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal secure the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle speed The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the
With drive position D selected, you can gear selector lever in park position
influence transmission shifting by limiting or P. With the SmartKey removed from
extending the gear range. the starter switch, the gear selector
lever is locked in park position P.
Transmission positions If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunctioning, the gear selector
The current transmission position appears in lever could remain locked in park
the multifunction display. position P. To unlock the gear
selector lever manually, see
“Manually unlocking the gear
selector lever” (Y page 222).
C Reverse gear
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
: Transmission position indicator

463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 89
Automatic transmission 89
Effect Working on the vehicle
A Neutral position G Warning!

No power is transmitted from the When working on the vehicle, engage the
engine to the drive axle. When the parking brake and shift the automatic
brakes are released, the vehicle can transmission into park position P. Otherwise
be moved freely (pushed or towed). the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
To avoid damage to the
Controls in detail
transmission, never shift the
automatic transmission into neutral
position N while driving. Gear ranges
Exceptions: With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
RIf the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning, shift the range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
automatic transmission into (Y page 90).
neutral position N if the vehicle is The current gear range appears in the
in danger of skidding. multifunction display.
RShift the automatic transmission
into neutral position N if you have
to shift the transfer case.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
for any other reason with the
automatic transmission in neutral
position N can result in
transmission damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
: Gear range indicator
7 Drive position
The automatic transmission shifts ! If the transfer case is in off-road position
automatically. All forward gears are LOW, the automatic transmission will not
available. shift up automatically, even when the
engine has reached the speed limit for that
gear. There is a risk of damaging the
Driving tips engine.
It is very important to make sure the
Kickdown permissible engine speed is not exceeded.
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 90
90 Automatic transmission
Effect Extending gear range

X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
= With this selection you can use the
right in the D+ direction.
braking effect of the engine.
The automatic transmission will shift into
5 Allows the use of engine’s braking the next higher gear as permitted by the
power when driving shift program. This action simultaneously
Ron steep downgrades extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
Controls in detail
Rin mountainous regions

Runder extreme operating i If you press on the accelerator pedal
conditions when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
4 For maximum use of engine’s the automatic transmission will upshift
braking effect on very steep or beyond any gear range limit selected.
lengthy downgrades.
Canceling gear range limit
X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
One-touch gearshifting the right in the D+ direction until D
With the automatic transmission in drive reappears in the multifunction display.
position D, you can limit or extend the gear The automatic transmission will shift from
range using the gear selector lever. the current gear range directly into drive
position D.
Limiting gear range
Shifting into optimal gear range
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
order to obtain braking action. This could the left in the D- direction.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle The automatic transmission will select the
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent gear range suited for optimal acceleration
this type of loss of control. and deceleration automatically. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
left in the D- direction.
The automatic transmission will shift into Emergency operation (limp-home
the next lower gear as permitted by the mode)
shift program. This action simultaneously
If vehicle acceleration becomes less
limits the gear range of the automatic
responsive or sluggish or the automatic
transmission.
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
i To avoid overrevving the engine when transmission is most likely operating in limp-
downshifting, the automatic transmission home (emergency operation) mode. In this
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s mode only second gear and reverse gear R
maximum speed would be exceeded. can be selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Turn off the engine.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 91
Transfer case 91
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. Switching transfer case

X Restart the engine.
The transfer case switch is located on the
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
lower part of the center console.
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
R.
X Have the automatic transmission checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Transfer case
For more information on off-road driving, see

“Off-road driving” (Y page 179).
Transfer case switch
Current transfer case indicator : appears in
Transfer case position the multifunction display.
H HIGH
Road position
L LOW
Off-road position
This position is intended for
driving off-road and step
gradients.
The automatic transmission
will not upshift
automatically to the next
higher gear range when G Warning!
driving at the rpm limit. Always wait until the procedure of shifting
The transfer case supports from HIGH to LOW – and from LOW to HIGH
the engine’s driving force – has been entirely completed. During this
(approximately 1/2 speed). procedure do not turn off the engine or shift
the automatic transmission into another gear.
Output is therefore
increased. If you do not wait until the shifting procedure
has been entirely completed then it might not
N Neutral be correctly performed. The transfer case
No power is transmitted might be in neutral, thus interrupting the
from the engine to the drive transfer of power between the engine and the
axle. drive axle.
The vehicle is then freely movable, even if a
gear has been selected, and could
unintentionally be set into motion –
particularly on up – or downhill grades. This
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 92
92 Transfer case
could lead to an accident and cause injury to X Press lower half (“HIGH”) of the transfer
yourself and others. case switch.
Please observe related messages appearing Once the shift is complete, transfer case
in the multifunction display. position H appears in transfer case
indicator :.
Switching from HIGH to LOW If the shifting procedure does not take place,
press lower half (“HIGH”) of the transfer case
! The shifting procedure can only be switch once more.
Controls in detail
performed when the following conditions X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
are met:
position D.
RThe engine is running.
RThe automatic transmission is in neutral Messages in the multifunction display
position N.
If a shift was not completed and one of the
RThe vehicle is not at a standstill. following messages appears in the
RThe vehicle speed does not exceed multifunction display:
25 mph (40 km/h). RTC shift conditions not fulfilled
X
The shift did not take place. At least one
Press upper half (“LOW”) of the transfer
shift condition was not met.
case switch.
Once the shift is complete, transfer case X Repeat the shifting procedure.
position L appears in transfer case RTC in neutral

indicator :.
The shift did not take place. The transfer
If the shifting procedure does not take place, case is in neutral. Transfer case position N
press upper half (“LOW”) of the transfer case appears in transfer case indicator :.
switch once more.
X Repeat the shifting procedure.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D. G Warning!
If the transfer case is in Neutral, the park
Switching from LOW to HIGH position P of the automatic transmission will
not hold the vehicle. The parking brake must
! The shifting procedure can only be
be engaged to hold the vehicle in place.
performed when the following conditions
are met: RTC shift procedure canceled
RThe engine is running. The shift did not take place.
RThe automatic transmission is in neutral X Repeat the shifting procedure.
position N. RTransfer case Visit workshop
RThe vehicle is not at a standstill. There may be a malfunction in the system.
RThe vehicle speed does not exceed X Repeat the shifting procedure.
43 mph (70 km/h). If the shifting procedure still does not take
place:
X Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 93
Differential locks 93
i If the SmartKey is in starter switch The ABS, BAS, and ESP® are switched off
position 0 or 1, an alarm will sound if the automatically when the transfer case
transfer case is in Neutral and the driver’s differential lock is activated.
door is opened.
Switch the transfer case to gear position For more information on off-road driving, see
HIGH or LOW. “Off-road driving” (Y page 179).
Controls in detail
Differential locks A few words about differentials and
differential locks
Differential locks improve the vehicle’s When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels on
tractive power off-road. Switch differential the outside of the curve must travel farther
locks and rotate faster than the inside wheels. The
Rfor off-road driving differential, the operation of a set of gears
that allows the powered wheels in a vehicle
Rto switch the ABS off during off-road driving
to turn at different speeds, makes this
Rfor driving through water essential function possible.
Rwhen driving on deep snow and icy or The drawback is that the differential also
fouled surfaces sends most of the engine’s power to the
wheel with the least load or strain on it. For
! Do not switch the front axle differential example, if one of a vehicle’s powered wheels
lock when driving around tight corners. This sits on a patch of snow and spins because
restricts steering ability. there is no traction, all of the engine’s power
will go to that wheel because the power will
! When driving off-road, apply only take the path of least resistance. Meanwhile,
moderate pressure to the accelerator pedal the opposite wheel, sitting on dry pavement
if the differential locks are switched on. where it could get enough grip to start the
When operating the vehicle on a single-axle vehicle moving, sits idle because it receives
dynamometer – no matter how briefly – you no power.
must The 4-ETS addresses this problem and
Rraise the axle not being driven provides for good control and steering ability
by automatically slowing the slipping wheel
or
and thus increasing the power to the other
Rdisconnect the drive shaft non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle
and moving. The ESP® and the 4-ETS in this
Rswitch the transfer case differential lock. vehicle feature such intelligent limited-slip
differential technology, ideally suited for on-
Otherwise the transfer case can be
road and light off-road driving. Transfer case
damaged, which is not covered by the
position LOW (Y page 91) also enhances off-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
road driving capabilities.
G Warning! More extreme off-road conditions may call for
Never drive on pavement with differential another solution, engaging a differential lock
locks switched. or preventing the differential from operating
Steering control will be strongly affected with altogether. This vehicle comes with three
the differential locks activated. differential locks: front, transfer case
(center), and rear. Each can be engaged
simply by pushing dashboard-mounted
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 94
94 Differential locks
switches in sequential order (center, rear, ? Engagement indicator lamps (yellow)

front) (Y page 94). When the transfer case A Function indicator lamps (red)
(center) differential is locked, half of the
engine’s power is automatically distributed to The differential locks can only be switched on
the front wheels and half to the rear wheels. in the sequence :, ;, =.
When the rear differential is locked, power
going to the rear wheels is equally distributed, Switching differential locks on
so that both rear wheels turn at the same
! To avoid damage to the transfer case and
Controls in detail
speed and torque. Please be aware that

differential locks:
engaging the differential locks will
significantly reduce the steering ability of the REngage the differential locks only at low
vehicle. speed (walking speed, not more than
For your safety and the safety of others and 5 mph [8 km/h]).
to prevent damage to the vehicle, the RDo not engage the differential locks if the
differential locks must not be engaged when driving wheels are spinning due to lack
driving on paved roads. It is important to of traction.
understand that during on-road/paved RDo not engage the differential locks on
driving, differentials are absolutely necessary
paved roads.
for providing the essential control and
steering ability of the vehicle. The differential Transfer case differential lock
locks, therefore, must not be engaged when
X Press switch :.
driving on paved roads and should only be
used to the extent necessary to negotiate off- Yellow engagement indicator lamp ? for
road conditions which cannot be handled by the transfer case differential lock comes
the systems (the 4-ETS, the ESP®, and the on.
manual switch position “LOW” of transfer The ESP® warning lamp d in the
case) this vehicle comes equipped with. instrument cluster comes on.
When the differential lock engagement
operation has been completed, the red
Switching differential locks on and off function indicator lamp A comes on.
The switches are located on the upper part of The message ABS not available
the center console. differential locked appears in the
multifunction display.
The ESP® warning lamp d and the !
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster come
on.
Once the transfer case differential lock is
switched on, you can now, if needed, switch
on rear axle differential lock ;, or switch on
rear axle differential lock ; and front
differential lock =.
: Transfer case (center) differential lock

; Rear axle differential lock
= Front differential lock
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 95
Instrument cluster 95
Rear axle differential lock G Warning!

X Press switch ;. Always remember to disengage the
Yellow engagement indicator lamp ? differential locks when returning to drive on
comes on first, followed by red function paved roads, see “A few words about
indicator lamp A. differentials and differential locks”.
The rear axle differential lock is switched
on.
Instrument cluster
Controls in detail
Front differential lock
Introduction
X Press switch =.
Yellow engagement indicator lamp ? For a full view illustration of the instrument
comes on first, followed by red function cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
indicator lamp A. (Y page 26).
The front differential lock is switched on. G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
Switching differential locks off instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
There are two different methods to disengage
differential locks: As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
RYou can switch the differential locks off in such as
reverse order (=, ;, :). Rspeed
RTo switch off all differential locks at the Routside temperature
same time:
Rwarning/indicator lamps
X Press switch :.
Rmalfunction/warning messages
Yellow engagement indicator
lamps ? go out first. Red function Rfailure of any systems
indicator lamps A go out when the Driving characteristics may be impaired.
switching process has been carried
If you must continue to drive, please do so
out in the differential.
with added caution. Contact an authorized
To activate the ESP®, BAS, and ABS systems, Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
drive again for 3 seconds using a constant
driving style.
All messages in the multifunction display
disappear. The ESP® warning lamp d and
the ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster go out.
i If red function indicator lamps A do not
go out when the differential locks are
disengaged, bring vehicle to a stop and
then continue driving. Changing the vehicle
load can help to disengage the differential
locks. : Reset button
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 96
96 Instrument cluster
For information on changing the instrument Steam from an overheated engine can cause
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see serious burns which can occur just by opening
(Y page 104). the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
Activating the instrument cluster other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
The instrument cluster is activated when you vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
Controls in detail
Ropen the driver’s door

Rswitch on the ignition During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-
Rpress
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
reset button :
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
Rswitch on the exterior lamps
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
The engine should not be operated with a
Adjusting the instrument cluster
coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†),
illumination
i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
Use reset button : to adjust the illumination temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
brightness for the instrument cluster and the serious engine damage which is not
switches on the center console. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
X To brighten illumination: Turn reset Warranty.
button : clockwise until the desired level
of illumination is reached.
Resetting trip odometer
X To dim illumination: Turn reset
button : counterclockwise until the X Make sure you are viewing the standard
desired level of illumination is reached. display (Y page 99) in the multifunction
display.
i The instrument cluster illumination is X Press and hold the reset button in the
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit instrument cluster (Y page 95) until the trip
ambient light conditions. odometer is reset.
The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps. Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
Coolant temperature gauge (Y page 26) denotes excessive engine speed.
The coolant temperature gauge is located on ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
the left side in the instrument cluster as it may result in serious engine damage
(Y page 26). that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
G Warning!
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
Driving when your engine is overheated can
interrupted if the engine is operated within
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the red marking.
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 97
Control system 97
Control system
Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 62).
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
Controls in detail
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display,
and much more.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
: Multifunction display
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the ; Press button
driver when traffic and road conditions permit
W to select submenus in the
it to be done safely.
X Settings menu
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
to set values
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately to set the volume
14 m) every second.
= Press button
The control system relays information to the 6 to answer a call
to dial2
to redial
Multifunction steering wheel ~ to end a call
to reject an incoming call
The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are ? Press button
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel. V to select next or previous menu
U
2 Function only available in telephone menu.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 98
98 Control system
X Press button V or U repeatedly to

A Press button briefly
pass through each menu one after the
& to move within a menu other.
* Within Audio/DVD menu to
X Press button * or & repeatedly to
select previous or next track, pass through each function display, one
scene or stored station after the other, in the current menu.
Within Telephone menu to In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
switch to the phone book and you will find a number of submenus for calling
Controls in detail
select a name or number up and changing settings. For instructions on

Press and hold button using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 103).
& Within Audio/DVD menu to
The number of menus available in the system
* select previous or next track
depends on which optional equipment is
with quick search or to select installed in your vehicle.
previous or next station in
station list or wave band
Within Telephone menu to Multifunction display
start the quick search in the
phone book
i Canada and AMG vehicles:

The steering wheel in this vehicle may vary
from steering wheel shown. However,
multifunction steering wheel symbols and
feature description apply to Canada and
AMG vehicles as well.
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering : Trip odometer
wheel will alter what appears in the ; Main odometer
multifunction display. = Transfer case indicator
The information available in the multifunction ? Transmission position/gear range
display is arranged in menus and indicator
accompanying functions and submenus. A Digital clock
The individual functions are then found within
B Outside temperature/digital
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
speedometer
under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant For more information on menus displayed in
information or to customize the settings for the multifunction display, see “Menus and
your vehicle. submenus” (Y page 99).
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 99
Control system 99
Menus and submenus
Controls in detail
i The headings used in the menus table are Standard display menu
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to
those shown in the multifunction display.
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
Function
: Standard display menu
(Y page 99)
; Audio/DVD menu (Y page 100) Standard display
= Navigation menu (Y page 102) In the standard display, trip odometer : and
main odometer ; appear in the
? Vehicle status message memory3 multifunction display.
menu (Y page 102)
X If you see another display, press button
A Settings menu (Y page 103) V or U repeatedly until the standard
display appears.
B Trip computer menu (Y page 109)
X Press button & or * to select the
C Telephone menu (Y page 110) functions in the Standard display menu.
3 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 100
100 Control system
The following functions are available:

RChecking tire inflation pressure with the
Advanced TPMS (Y page 157)
RCalling up digital speedometer or outside
temperature (Y page 100)
RCalling up maintenance service indicator
display (Y page 186)
Controls in detail
RChecking engine oil level (Y page 150)
Calling up digital speedometer or Outside temperature

outside temperature
You can select whether the digital Audio/DVD menu
speedometer or the outside temperature
appears in the multifunction display The functions in the Audio/DVD menu
(Y page 105). operate the audio or video equipment which
you have currently switched on.
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device RSelecting radio station (Y page 100)
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. ROperating audio devices/audio media
Indicated temperatures just above the (Y page 101)
freezing point do not guarantee that the road ROperating video DVD (Y page 101)
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. If no audio equipment is currently switched
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the
X Press button & or * repeatedly until multifunction display.
the digital speedometer or the outside
temperature appears in the multifunction Selecting radio station
display. The HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio is
treated as a radio application.
For more information on HD Radio with
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service
provider are required for satellite radio
operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
Digital speedometer
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 101
Control system 101
X Switch on the COMAND system and select separate COMAND system operating
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system instructions.
operating instructions. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
X Press button V or U repeatedly until the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
the currently tuned station appears in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Example illustration
Example illustration : Disc number
: Wave band setting ; Current track
; Station frequency
X Selecting next or previous track: Press
X Selecting next or previous stored button * or & briefly.
station: Press button * or & briefly X Selecting a track from the track list
to select a stored station. (quick search): Press and hold button
X Selecting next or previous station in the * or &.
station list: Press and hold button * or The current track does not appear during
& to select a station. Audio AUX mode operation.
X Selecting next or previous station in
wave band (Only if no station list is Operating video DVD
available): Press and hold button * or
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
& to select a station.
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
You can only store new stations using the system operating instructions.
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to X Press button V or U repeatedly until
separate COMAND system operating
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
Operating audio devices/audio media

X Switch on the COMAND system and select
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 102
102 Control system
Vehicle status message memory

menu
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the memory.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicle’s system has
Controls in detail
recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu
: Disc number only appears if messages have been stored.
; Current scene
G Warning!
X Press button * or & to select a Malfunction and warning messages are only
scene. indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
Navigation menu simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
The Navigation menu contains the functions replace the owner’s and/or driver’s
needed to operate your navigation system. responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
X Press button V or U repeatedly until operating safety. Have all required
the Navigation menu appears in the maintenance and safety checks performed on
multifunction display. the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
The message shown in the multifunction Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
display depends on the status of the malfunction and warning messages.
navigation system:
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in the the Vehicle status message memory
multifunction display. menu appears in the multifunction display.
If conditions have occurred causing status
RWith the COMAND system switched on messages to be recorded, the number of
but route guidance not activated, the messages appears in the multifunction
direction of travel and, if applicable, the display.
name of the street currently traveled on
appear in the multifunction display.
RWith the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, the
direction of travel and maneuver
instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
Please refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions for instructions on how
to activate the route guidance system.
: Number of recorded status messages

463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 103
Control system 103
X Press button & or *. Resetting to factory settings

The stored messages will now be displayed
You can reset the functions of all submenus
in the order in which they have occurred.
to the factory settings.
For malfunction and warning messages,
For safety reasons, the function Headlamp
see “Vehicle status messages in the
Mode in the Lighting submenu cannot be
multifunction display” (Y page 196).
reset while driving.
i After you have scrolled through all The following message appears in the
Controls in detail
recorded status messages, the first multifunction display: Cannot be
recorded message appears again. completely reset to factory
Should the vehicle’s system record any settings while driving.
conditions while driving, the number of X Press button V or U repeatedly until
messages will reappear in the multifunction the Settings menu appears in the
display when the SmartKey in the starter multifunction display.
switch is turned to position 0 or removed
from the starter switch.
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you switch off the ignition.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function To reset: Press X Press the reset button in the instrument
reset button for 3 secs., with which you cluster (Y page 95) for approximately
can reset all the settings to the original 3 seconds.
factory settings and a collection of submenus The request to press the reset button once
with which you can make individual settings more to confirm appears in the
for your vehicle. multifunction display.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 103)
RSubmenus in the Settings menu
(Y page 104)
RInstrument cluster submenu
(Y page 104)
RLighting submenu (Y page 106)
RVehicle submenu (Y page 108)
RConvenience submenu (Y page 108) X Press the reset button once more.
The functions of all the submenus will be
reset to factory settings.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 104
104 Control system
The settings you have changed will not be Instrument cluster submenu
reset unless you confirm the action by RSelecting speedometer display mode
pressing the reset button a second time. After (Y page 105)
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings RSelecting language (Y page 105)
menu reappears in the multifunction display.
RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
Submenus in the Settings menu outside temperature) for status indicator
(Y page 105)
Controls in detail
the Settings menu appears in the Lighting submenu

multifunction display. RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA
X Press button &. only) (Y page 106)
The collection of the submenus appears in RSetting locator lighting (Y page 106)
the multifunction display. There are more
RSetting night security illumination
submenus than can be simultaneously
displayed. (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
(Y page 107)
RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 108)
Vehicle submenu
RSetting automatic central locking
(Y page 108)
Convenience submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 109)
X Press button X.
Instrument cluster submenu
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. Access the Inst. Cluster submenu via the
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up Settings menu. Use the Inst. Cluster
with button W. submenu to change the instrument cluster
X With the selection marker on the desired
display settings.
submenu, use button & to access the The following functions are available:
individual functions within that submenu. RSelecting speedometer display mode
X Once within the submenu, use button (Y page 105)
& to move to the next function or button RSelecting language (Y page 105)
* to move to the previous function RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
within that submenu. outside temperature) for status indicator
X Use button W or X to change the (Y page 105)
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can
be found on the following pages.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 105
Control system 105
Selecting speedometer display mode

the Settings menu appears in the
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Inst. Cluster
Controls in detail
submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until
the message Disp.Unit Speed-/Odom.
appears in the multifunction display. X Press button W or X to select the
The selection marker is on the current language to be used for the multifunction
setting. display messages.
Selecting display (digital speedometer or

outside temperature) for status indicator
X Press button &.
W or X to the Instr. Cluster
submenu.
X Press button W or X to set the message Status Line Display
speedometer unit to Km or Miles. appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
Selecting language setting.
X Press button &.
W or X to the Inst. Cluster
submenu.
the message Language appears in the
setting. X Press button W or X to select the
desired setting.
The selected display is then shown
continuously in the status indicator (lower
display).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 106
106 Control system
The other display now appears in the X Press button W or X to select

Standard display menu (Y page 99). manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant).
Lighting submenu With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in position
Access the Lighting submenu via the
$ or Ã, the low-beam headlamps are
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
switched on when the engine is running.
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
In low ambient light conditions the following
Controls in detail
your vehicle.
lamps will come on additionally:
RParking lamps
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 106) RTail lamps
RSetting locator lighting (Y page 106) RLicense plate lamps
RSetting night security illumination RSide marker lamps
(Y page 107) For more information on the daytime running
RSetting interior lighting delayed shut-off lamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 73).
(Y page 108) For safety reasons, changing the setting for
the daytime running lamp mode is not
Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA possible while the vehicle is in motion.
only)
The following message appears in the
X Press button V or U repeatedly until multifunction display:
the Settings menu appears in the Settings can only be made at a
multifunction display. standstill.
X Press button &. For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
X Move the selection marker with button of all submenus to the factory settings while
W or X to the Lighting submenu. driving (Y page 103) will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
the message Headlamp Mode appears in Setting locator lighting
the multifunction display. With the locator lighting feature activated and
The selection marker is on the current the exterior lamp switch in position Ã, the
setting. following lamps will come on during darkness
when the vehicle is unlocked using button
% on the SmartKey:
RParking lamps
RTail lamps
RSide marker lamps
RFront fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 107
Control system 107
lamps will go out automatically after RSide marker lamps

approximately 40 seconds. RFront fog lamps
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
the Settings menu appears in the open a door or do not close an opened door,
multifunction display. the lamps will automatically go out after
X Press button &. 60 seconds.
X Move the selection marker with button X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Controls in detail
W or X to the Lighting submenu. the Settings menu appears in the
X Press button & or * repeatedly until multifunction display.
the message Surround Lighting appears X Press button &.
in the multifunction display. X Move the selection marker with button
The selection marker is on the current W or X to the Lighting submenu.
setting.
the message Headl. delay Switch Off
appears in the multifunction display.
setting.
X Press button W or X to switch the

locator lighting function On or Off.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
Ã when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated. X Press button W or X to switch the
Setting night security illumination headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) Off.
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for Ã before turning off the engine.
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
vehicle and closing all doors. activated.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position Ã before the engine is turned off,
the following lamps will come on when the
engine is turned off:
RParking lamps
RTail lamps
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 108
108 Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the Vehicle submenu

headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
SmartKey in the starter switch to position to set the automatic central locking.
0.
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to Setting automatic central locking
position 0. Use this function to activate or deactivate the
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is automatic central locking. With the automatic
Controls in detail
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as central locking system activated, the vehicle
you start the engine. is centrally locked at a vehicle speed of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off X Press button V or U repeatedly until
Use this function to set whether you would the Settings menu appears in the
like the interior lighting to remain on for multifunction display.
10 seconds during darkness after you have X Press button &.
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
W or X to the Vehicle submenu.
multifunction display. the message Automatic Door Lock
X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button setting.
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
the message Interior Light.
Delay.Sw.Off appears in the
setting.
X Press button W or X to switch the

automatic central locking On or Off.
Convenience submenu
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience
X Press button W or X to switch the submenu to activate the easy-entry/exit
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature feature.
On or Off.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 109
Control system 109
Activating easy-entry/exit feature X Press button W or X to switch the

Use this function to activate and deactivate easy-entry feature On or Off.
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 68).
G Warning!
Trip computer menu
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering Use the Trip computer menu to call up
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is statistical data on your vehicle.
Controls in detail
activated. The following information is available:
To stop steering wheel movement do one of RFuel consumption statistics since start
the following: (Y page 109)
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk. RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
RPress one of the memory position buttons. (Y page 110)
RPress the memory button. RResetting fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 110)
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. RDistance to empty (Y page 110)
Children could open the driver’s door and When you enter the Trip computer menu,
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit you will always see the fuel consumption
feature, which could result in an accident statistics since start first.
Fuel consumption statistics since start
the Settings menu appears in the X Press button U or V repeatedly until
multifunction display. the message From Start appears in the
X Press button &. multifunction display.
W or X to the Convenience
submenu.
the message Easy-entry Function
setting.
: Distance driven since start

; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
? Average fuel consumption since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 110
110 Control system
Resetting will not occur if you turn the Distance to empty

SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
time period.
the message From Start appears in the
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
the message Range: appears in the
X Press button U or V repeatedly until multifunction display.
the message From Start appears in the
Controls in detail
The calculated remaining driving range

multifunction display. based on the current fuel tank level
X Press button & or * repeatedly until appears in the multifunction display.
the message From Reset appears in the If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a fuel
multifunction display. pump 7 appears instead of the
remaining driving range.
: Distance driven since last reset

; Time elapsed since last reset
= Average speed since last reset
Telephone menu
? Average fuel consumption since last reset
G Warning!
Resetting fuel consumption statistics A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
your safety and the safety of others, we
the message From Start appears in the recommend that you pull over to a safe
multifunction display. location and stop before placing or taking a
X Press button & or * repeatedly until telephone call. If you choose to use the
the reading that you want to reset appears telephone while driving, please use the hands-
in the multifunction display. free device and only use the telephone when
X Press and hold the reset button in the weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
instrument cluster until the respective Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
values are reset to 0. using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
The fuel consumption statistics reset Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 111
Control system 111
You can connect your telephone to the Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see call
separate COMAND system operating X Press button ~.
instructions.
X Switch on the COMAND system.
Dialing a number from the phone book
Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions. When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Press button U or V repeatedly until you may select and dial a number from the
Controls in detail
phone book at any time.
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display. X Press button U or V repeatedly until
One of the following messages will appear the message TEL appears in the
in the multifunction display: multifunction display.
RNo Service: No network is available. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
RBluetooth the desired name appears in the

Ready: The telephone has
not been connected to the COMAND
system via Bluetooth® yet. If you press and hold button & or
* for longer than 1 second, the system
X Connect the telephone to the
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
until you release the button again.
RReady or name of the network provider The stored names are displayed in
(if available): The telephone has found a alphabetical order.
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the
multifunction display you will then see the
following message, or if available, the caller
ID (number or name):
: Selected name from the phone book
X Press button 6.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
X Press button 6.
You have answered the call.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 112
112 Driving systems
The control system stores the dialed The ABS, BAS, EBB, ESP® and 4-ETS driving
number in the redial memory. safety systems are described in the “Safety
or and security” section (Y page 50).
X Press button ~ if you do not want to
make the call.
Cruise control
The cruise control maintains the speed you
set for your vehicle automatically.
Controls in detail
The use of the cruise control is recommended

for driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
The currently set speed or last set speed
(“Resume” function) appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
2 seconds.
i The cruise control should not be activated
Redialing during off-road driving.
The control system stores the most recently G Warning!

dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the The cruise control is a convenience system
need to search through your entire phone designed to assist the driver during vehicle
book. operation. The driver is and must always
X Press button U or V repeatedly until remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display. Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
X Press button 6.
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
The first number in the redial memory
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow safe
the desired number or name appears in the driving at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
X Press button 6.
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
The control system dials the selected
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
phone number.
spin and loss of control.
RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
Driving systems in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be
Introduction
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
RCruise control previously set speed and wishes to resume
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC) this particular preset speed.
RRear Parking Assist
RRear view camera
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 113
Driving systems 113
Canceling cruise control

X Depress the brake pedal.
or
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow =.
The last set speed is stored for later use.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
Controls in detail
when the engine is turned off.
The cruise control also switches off
: Setting current or higher speed automatically when
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
; Setting current or lower speed
= Canceling the cruise control
(30 km/h)
? Resume to last set speed Rthe ESP® is in operation
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
Activating cruise control switch
You can activate the cruise control at a Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). malfunction
You cannot activate the cruise control Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
Rwhen you brake neutral position N while driving
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
control will resume the last set speed.
position N
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off Changing the set speed
due to a malfunction
G Warning!
Setting current speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired adjustments.
speed. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in a value that the prevailing road conditions and
direction of arrow : or press in direction legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
of arrow ;. and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
X Remove your foot from the accelerator of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
pedal. or serious injury to you and others.
i On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise When you use the cruise control lever to
control may not be able to maintain the set decelerate, the transmission will
speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed automatically downshift if the engine’s
will be resumed. braking power does not brake the vehicle
sufficiently.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 114
114 Driving systems
X Increasing: Lift the cruise control lever in Always engage the parking brake in addition
direction of arrow : and hold it up until to shifting the automatic transmission into
the desired speed is reached. park position P.
X Decreasing: Press the cruise control lever
On uphill grades, the hill start assist system
in direction of arrow ; and hold it down
maintains the pressure in the brake system
until the desired speed is reached.
for approximately 1 second after you have
X Release the cruise control lever.
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Controls in detail
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving

accelerate or decelerate. immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: X Depress the brake pedal.
1 km/h) increments X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
X Increasing: Briefly tip the cruise control position D or reverse gear R.

lever in direction of arrow :. X Release the brake pedal.
X Decreasing: Briefly tip the cruise control X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
lever in direction of arrow ;. The hill start assist system is inactive

Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
Setting stored speed (Resume grades
function) Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
G Warning! position N
The set speed stored in memory should only Rwith the parking brake engaged
be set again if prevailing road conditions and Rifthe ESP® has switched off due to a
legal speed limits permit. Possible malfunction
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
to you and others.
Your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in (4MATIC). Both, the front and rear axle, are
direction of arrow ?. powered at all times when the vehicle is being
X Remove your foot from the accelerator operated. The 4MATIC improves traction in
pedal. conjunction with the ESP® (Y page 52) and
The last stored speed is deleted from memory the Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
when the engine is turned off. (Y page 53).
G Warning!
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
Hill start assist system traction:
G Warning! RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
The hill start assist system is not designed to possible.
function as a parking brake. It does not RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked pedal.
on an incline.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 115
Driving systems 115
Failure to observe these guidelines could and the automatic transmission is in reverse
cause the vehicle to skid. gear R.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents The Rear Parking Assist system monitors the
resulting from excessive speed. rear surroundings of your vehicle with four
sensors in the rear bumper.
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the gear selector lever must
be in neutral position N and the SmartKey
Controls in detail
must be in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, the vehicle may be towed only
for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at
a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
If the vehicle is towed with one axle raised
(observe instructions regarding flexible
drive shaft and propeller shafts), the engine
must be shut off and the SmartKey must be To function properly, sensors : must be free
in starter switch position 1. Otherwise, the of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
4-ETS may become engaged which may sensors : regularly, being careful not to
cause loss of towing control. scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the Rear Parking Assist system sensors”
! Only conduct operational or performance (Y page 190).
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
G Warning!
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could The Rear Parking Assist is a supplemental
otherwise seriously damage the brake system. It is not intended to, nor does it
system and/or the transfer case which is replace, the need for extreme care. The
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited responsibility during parking and other critical
Warranty. maneuvers always remains with the driver.
i In winter operation, the maximum G Warning!

effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only Make sure no persons or animals are in or
achieved with winter tires (Y page 175) or near the area in which you are parking/
snow chains as required. maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
Rear Parking Assist system ! Special attention must be paid to objects

with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
The Rear Parking Assist system is an
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
designed to assist the driver during parking
objects may not be detected by the system
maneuvers. It indicates the relative distance
and can damage the vehicle.
between the rear of the vehicle and an
obstacle visually and audibly. During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or below
The Rear Parking Assist system is activated
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
automatically when you switch on the ignition
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
Rear Parking Assist system will not detect
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 116
116 Driving systems
such objects at close range and damage to may no longer be indicated by the Rear
your vehicle or the object may result. Parking Assist system.
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources Warning indicators

(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of Visual signals indicate to the driver the
the Rear Parking Assist system. relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle.
Controls in detail
Range of the sensors
The warning indicator is divided into four

yellow and two red distance segments :.
The Rear Parking Assist system is ready to
measure when you hear a signal and
readiness indicator ; is illuminated.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or
more distance segments : will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the sixth
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
An intermittent acoustic warning will sound
when the fourth yellow distance segment
illuminates. This signal quickens with each
Sensors
additional distance segment lit. When the
Center approx. 59 in (150 cm) sixth distance segment illuminates, the
acoustic warning becomes a constant signal.
Corners approx. 40 in (100 cm) The signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into drive position D,
Minimum distance
or park position P.
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners approx. 8 in (20 cm)
If the Rear Parking Assist system detects an

obstacle in this range, all the distance
warning segments illuminate and you hear a
warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than
the minimum distance, the actual distance
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 117
Driving systems 117
Rear Parking Assist system G Warning!

malfunction The rear view camera either will not function
If no distance segments illuminate and no or will not function to its full capability if
acoustic warning sounds, there is a Rthe tailgate is open
malfunction in the Rear Parking Assist Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
system.
Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering
X Have the Rear Parking Assist system your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
Controls in detail
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
Center as soon as possible.
light
Rthe immediate surroundings are
Rear view camera illuminated with fluorescent light (the
display may flicker)
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image, e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
like in the rear view mirror. the cold (lens condensation)
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
G Warning!
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/ In this case, have the position and setting
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be of the camera checked by a qualified
injured. specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
G Warning! Benz Center for this purpose.
The rear view camera is only an aid and may Do not use the rear view camera in these
display obstacles from a distorted situations. Otherwise you could injure
perspective or inaccurately, or may not yourself or others and/or damage property
display obstacles at all. The rear view camera including your vehicle while parking/
does not relieve you of the responsibility to be maneuvering.
cautious, take care and pay careful attention.
The rear view camera may not show objects
which are
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper

Runder the spare wheel
Rnearby behind the spare wheel
You are responsible for safety at all times and
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others. snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 118
118 Driving systems
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens” function on the COMAND system while
(Y page 190). reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
image again, disengage and reengage
Switching on/off reverse gear R.
X Switching on: Switch on the ignition. X Switching off: Shift the automatic
X Switch on the COMAND system. transmission into park position P, neutral
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse position N, or drive position D.
Controls in detail
gear R. or
The area behind the vehicle appears in the X Select another function on the COMAND
COMAND system display. system.
i The image from the rear view camera will
no longer be displayed if you select another
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 119
Climate control system 119
Climate control system

Control panel
Climate control
Controls in detail
Function Recommendation/Notes
1 Air volume control (Y page 123)
Climate control on/ i Switches on the climate control system. (Y page 121)
off
2 Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 121)
control, driver’s side
3 Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 121)
control, passenger
side
4 Air distribution (Y page 123)
control
5 ª Rear window (Y page 125)
defroster (USA only)
£ Rear window
defroster (Canada
only)
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 120
120 Climate control system
Function Recommendation/Notes
6 AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air conditioning. The (Y page 121)
indicator lamp in button Á comes on.
Residual heat/ i With the engine turned off, it is possible (Y page 124)
ventilation to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior.
Controls in detail
7 Air distribution and (Y page 121)

air volume
(automatic mode)
8 Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 124)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
9 ¥ Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 123)
(USA only) windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
z Front defroster
(Canada only)
Notes on climate control system possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.
The climate control system is operational
whenever the engine is running. You can The air conditioning will not engage (no
operate the climate control system in either cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 121) is
the automatic or manual mode. The system deactivated.
cools or heats the interior depending on the
selected interior temperature and the current G Warning!
outside temperature. Follow the recommended settings for heating
It can only function optimally when you are and cooling given on the following pages.
driving with the windows and the tilt/sliding Otherwise the windows could fog up,
sunroof closed. impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
passenger compartment through the air
windshield free of snow and debris.
distribution system.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
G Warning!
interior before driving off, see “Summer
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
opening feature” (Y page 82). The climate
may require replacement of the filter before
control will then adjust the interior
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
temperature to the set value much faster.
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 121
Deactivating the climate control The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
system R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer.
X Deactivating: Set air volume control :
(Y page 119) to position 0. ! If the air conditioning cannot be activated
X Reactivating: Set air volume control : to
again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
any speed.
compressor has turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
Have the air conditioning checked at the
Controls in detail
effect.
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Air conditioning Automatic mode

The air conditioning is operational while the When operating the climate control system in
engine is running and cools the interior air to automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
the temperature set by the operator. In air volume and air distribution are adjusted
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies automatically.
the interior air and helps prevent window
In automatic mode, cooling with
fogging.
dehumidification is switched on. This function
G Warning! can be switched off if necessary.
If you switch off the cooling function, the G Warning!
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
If you switch off the cooling function, the
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
visibility and endanger you and others.
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and X Set the desired temperature
not an indication of a malfunction. (Y page 121).
X Activating: Press button Ã.
Deactivating The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
It is possible to deactivate the air The air volume and air distribution are
conditioning. The interior air will then no adjusted automatically.
longer be cooled or dehumidified. X Deactivating: Press button Ã again.
X Press button Á. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. Automatic control of air volume and air
The cooling function switches off after a distribution are switched off.
short delay.
Activating Setting temperature

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can You can adjust the air temperature on each
dehumidify the interior air with the air side of the passenger compartment. You
conditioning. should raise or lower the temperature setting
in small increments, preferably starting at
X Press button Á.
72‡ (22†).
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 122
122 Climate control system
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn Center air vents

temperature control ; and/or =
(Y page 119) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise.
i If you turn the temperature control fully
clockwise or counterclockwise for one side
of the vehicle, you are increasing or
Controls in detail
decreasing the temperature for the other

side of the vehicle as well.
Adjusting air vents

: Left center air vent, adjustable
G Warning! ; Right center air vent, adjustable
When operating the climate control, the air = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
that enters the passenger compartment adjustable right center air vent
through the air vents can be very hot or very ? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
cold (depending on the set temperature). This adjustable left center air vent
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents. X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
Always keep sufficient distance between and ? in the required direction.
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution Side air vents
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
For best possible performance of the climate

control:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction. Example illustration passenger side
i For draft-free ventilation, move the : Right side defroster air vent, fixed
adjustable center and side air vents to the ; Right side air vent, adjustable
middle position. = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right side air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = in
the required direction.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 123
Rear center console air vents You can also turn the control to a position
between two symbols.
Adjusting air volume

X Decrease/increase: Turn air volume
control : (Y page 119) clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Controls in detail
Front defroster
: Thumbwheel for air volume control for You can use this setting to defrost the
rear center air vents windshield, for example if it is iced up.
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable You can also defog the windshield and the
= Left rear center air vent, adjustable side windows.
X
i Keep this setting selected only until the
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :
windshield or the side windows are clear
upward or downward.
again.
X Activating: Press button ¥4 or z5.
Adjusting air distribution The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The symbols on the control represent the The climate control switches to the following
following functions: functions automatically:
Rcooling on to dehumidify
Symbol Function
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
M Directs air to the windshield and power, depending on outside temperature
through the side defroster air
Rair flows onto the windshield and the front
vents
side windows
Q Directs air into the entire Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off
vehicle interior
O Directs air to the footwells and
i If you have activated on the defrost
through the side air vents function with button ¥ or z, you
cannot make any other settings.
P Directs air through the center X Deactivating: Press button ¥ or z
and side air vents
again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The air distribution can be adjusted manually. The previous settings are once again in
X Turn air distribution control ? effect.
(Y page 119) to the desired symbol.
The air distribution is adjusted according to
the chosen setting.
4 USA only
5 Canada only
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 124
124 Front windshield defroster
Windshield fogged on the outside i The manually selected air recirculation

X
mode is deactivated automatically:
Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 79). Rafter5 minutes if the outside
If the automatic mode of the climate control temperature is below approximately
is switched off: 41‡ (5†)
X Turn air distribution control to position Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
P or O. turned off
Controls in detail
Rafter30 minutes if the outside

temperature is above approximately
Air recirculation mode 41‡ (5†)
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through Residual heat and ventilation
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of With the engine switched off, it is possible to
outside air and recirculates the air in the continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
passenger compartment. up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
G Warning!
Fogged windows impair visibility, i How long the system will provide heating
endangering you and others. If the windows depends on the coolant temperature and
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the the selected temperature. The blower will
air recirculation mode immediately should run at low speed regardless of the air
clear interior window fogging. If interior distribution control setting.
window fogging persists, make sure the air
X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
conditioning is activated, or press button
X Press button Á.
z or ¥.
X Activating: Press button g. X Deactivating: Press button Á.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i The air recirculation mode is activated The residual heat is deactivated
automatically at high outside automatically:
temperatures. Rwhen the ignition is switched on
The indicator lamp in button g is not lit Rafter approximately 30 minutes
when the air recirculation mode is switched
Rif the battery voltage drops
on automatically.
If the air conditioning has been turned off Rif the coolant temperature is too low
or the outside temperature is below 41‡
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically. Front windshield defroster
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes. The windshield defroster uses a large amount
of power. To keep battery drain to a minimum,
X Deactivating: Press button g again. switch off the windshield defroster as soon as
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. the windshield is clear.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 125
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 125
The windshield defroster switches off Rear window defroster

automatically after 10 minutes.
If you switch on the windshield defroster for G Warning!
the fourth time in succession, it will switch off Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
automatically after 5 minutes. removed from the rear window before driving.
You cannot switch on the windshield Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
defroster if the outside temperature is above endangering you and others.
50‡ (10†).
Controls in detail
The rear window defroster uses a large
G Warning! amount of power. To keep the battery drain
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
removed from the windshield before driving. soon as the rear window is clear. The
Visibility could otherwise be impaired, defroster is switched off automatically after
endangering you and others. approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation
depending on the outside temperature.
X Switching on: Press button ª6 or |
7 on the respective climate control panel.

X Switching off: Press button ª or
| again.
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
needed if required.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage,
X Switch on the ignition. the rear window defroster switches back on
X
automatically.
Switching on: Press windshield defroster
switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on. Power tilt/sliding sunroof
X Switching off: Press windshield defroster
switch : once more. Opening and closing
Indicator lamp ; goes out. G Warning!
! If too many electrical consumers are When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
operating simultaneously and there is sure there is no danger of anyone being
insufficient voltage in the battery, indicator harmed by the closing procedure.
lamp ; in windshield defroster switch : The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
starts flashing. After approximately sunroof can be immediately halted by
30 seconds the system responds releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
automatically by switching the windshield switch was moved past the resistance point
defroster off. and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
any direction.
6 USA only
7 Canada only
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 126
126 Loading and storing
The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding

sunroof can be immediately halted by
releasing the sunroof switch.The closing
procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be
immediately reversed by moving the sunroof
switch in direction : or ?.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
Controls in detail
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an

opening also presents a potential for injury for
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as Sunroof switch
entire body parts or portions of them may : Raising
protrude from the passenger compartment.
; Lowering
G Observe Safety notes, see page 44. = Closing
i The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or ? Opening
closed manually should an electrical X Switch on the ignition.
malfunction occur (Y page 223).
X Opening, closing, raising and lowering
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not manually: Move and hold the sunroof
transport any objects with sharp edges switch to the resistance point in direction
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding of arrow : to ?.
sunroof. X Release the sunroof switch when the
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there desired position is reached.

is snow or ice on the roof, as this could X Express opening: To open the tilt/sliding
result in malfunctions. sunroof completely, move the sunroof
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding switch past the resistance point in
sunroof due to a malfunction contact direction of arrow ? and release.
Roadside Assistance or an authorized X Stopping during express opening: Move
Mercedes-Benz Center. the sunroof switch in any direction.
! Please keep in mind that weather

conditions can sometimes change rapidly. Loading and storing
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters Loading instructions
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by G Warning!
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding fastening materials appropriate for the weight
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer and size of the load.
opening feature” (Y page 82) and In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
“Convenience closing feature” maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
(Y page 82). inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 127
Loading and storing 127
vehicle occupants unless the items are For more information, see “Tire and Loading
securely fastened in the vehicle. Information” (Y page 161).
To help avoid personal injury during a collision The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when vehicle depend greatly on the load
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or distribution. It is therefore recommended to
cargo higher than the seat backrests. load the vehicle according to the illustration
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open. shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may towards the front of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
enter vehicle interior resulting in i The cargo compartment is the preferred
unconsciousness and death. place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
volume (Y page 128) should only be used
Load distribution for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways pad off sharp edges.
RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) which is the front or rear seat backrests.
weight of the vehicle including
Rfuel
Rtools
Rspare wheel
Rinstalled accessories
Rpassengers
Rluggage/cargo
It must never exceed the load limit and the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are For additional safety when transporting cargo
specified on the placard located on the while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 246). the outer seat belts crosswise into the
In addition, the load must be distributed so opposite side buckles :.
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for
your vehicle are indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 246).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 128
Roof rack
This vehicle is not intended to carry items on
its roof. Thus roof rails and any roof-mounted
devices must not be used.
G Warning!
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
Controls in detail
could result in an accident.
Parcel net
Expanding cargo volume
G Warning!
Parcel nets are intended for storing light- To expand the cargo volume, you can fold the
weight items only, such as road maps, mail, left and right rear seat backrests and the rear
etc. seat bench forward.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or G Warning!
fragile objects may not be transported in the Always lock seat backrest in its upright
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard position when the rear seat bench is
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause in use.
injury to vehicle occupants. Check for secure locking by pushing and
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods pulling on the seat backrest.
in the event of an accident. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
A parcel net is located in the front passenger maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
footwell. inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Cargo tie-down rings To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
Your vehicle is equipped with four cargo tie-
transporting cargo.
down rings.
Always follow loading instructions G Warning!
(Y page 126). Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even load Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
on all cargo tie-down rings with rope of enter vehicle interior resulting in
sufficient strength to hold down the cargo. unconsciousness and death.
G Warning!
Failure to assure that the seat bench and seat
backrests are locked into place could result
in an increased chance of injury in an
accident.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 129
Loading and storing 129
Never place hands under seat or near any X Returning rear seat backrest to original
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. position: Relieve the tension on the rear
For safety reasons, the rear seat bench must seat backrest and pull release lever :.
only be adjusted when the vehicle is X Raise the rear seat backrest until it locks
stationary. into place.
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open. ! Make sure that the seat belt is not
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
pinched when folding rear seat backrest.
enter vehicle interior resulting in
Controls in detail
unconsciousness and death. X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the rear seat backrest.
! Before folding the rear seat backrest and
the rear seat bench forward, make sure
that all containers in the rear cup holder are Cargo compartment cover blind
removed.
The cargo compartment cover blind can be
installed behind the rear seat bench.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed, do not pile luggage higher than
the lower edges of the rear side windows.
X Folding rear seat backrest: Pull release

lever : in direction of arrow and fold the
rear seat backrest forward until it locks into
place.
X Folding rear seat bench: Remove the
middle rear seat head restraint X Rolling out: Grip the blind strap and pull
(Y page 65). cargo compartment cover blind :
X If necessary, pull the driver’s and/or front rearward across the cargo compartment.
passenger seat forward. X Engage cargo compartment cover
X Fold the rear seat backrests forward. blind : into the mounts to the left and
X Pull release lever ; in direction of arrow.
right of the tailgate.
X Rolling up: Disengage cargo compartment
X Fold the rear seat bench forward.
cover blind : from the mounts and guide
X Adjust front seats to desired position.
retraction.
X Returning rear seat bench to original
position: Fold the rear seat bench together
with the rear seat backrest rearward until
it locks into place.
X Install the middle rear seat head restraint
(Y page 65).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 130
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help

to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
X Removing: Roll up cargo compartment could result in an accident.
cover blind =.
X Open latch ; on the right and left side of Front storage compartments
cargo compartment cover blind = in
direction of the arrow. Glove box
X Pull cargo compartment cover blind = out An media interface is located in the glove box.
upwards. For information on media interface, see
separate COMAND system operating
X Installing: Open latch ; on the right and
instructions.
left side.
X Place cargo compartment cover blind =
into recesses.
X Press the right and left side of cargo
compartment cover blind = down until it
locks into place.
X Close latch ; on the right and left side.
X Make sure the blind is securely fastened.
Storage compartments
X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.
G Warning! X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
To help avoid personal injury during a collision until it engages.
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or Locking and unlocking the glove box
cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the vehicle is in the shop for service.
seat backrests. The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy with the mechanical key.
objects.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 131
Useful features 131
Storage box in front of armrest
Controls in detail
1 Glove box unlocked
2 Glove box locked
X Opening storage box: Slide storage box
Storage compartment/storage tray cover : upward.
below armrest X Closing storage box: Slide storage box
cover : downward.
Rear storage compartments

Storage bags
G Warning!
Storage bags are intended for storing light-
weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
storage bag. In an accident, during hard
X Opening storage tray: Press button :
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
and lift up armrest cover.
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
X Closing storage tray: Lower armrest
injury to vehicle occupants.
cover until it engages in lock. Storage bags cannot protect transported
X Opening storage compartment: Press goods in the event of an accident.
button ; and lift up armrest cover.
X Closing storage compartment: Lower Storage bags are located on the back of the
armrest cover until it engages in lock. front seats.
i Located in the cover of the storage tray is

a storage area for small items. Useful features
i The Roadside Assistance button º Cup holders

(Y page 137) and the Information button G Warning!
E (Y page 138) are located in the
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
storage tray. vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 132
132 Useful features
not fill containers to a height where the Cup holder in front passenger footwell
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.

An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup X Swing cup holder : upwards until it clicks
holder may come loose during braking, into place.
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects ! Fold the cup holder closed before moving
thrown around in the vehicle interior may the front passenger seat fully forward.
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury. Cup holder in rear passenger footwell
Cup holder next to armrest
! Before folding the rear seat backrest and

the rear seat bench forward, make sure
X Place bracket of cup holder : into recess that all containers in the rear cup holder are
indicated by arrow of cup holder base ;. removed.
If the cup holder is no longer in use, it can for
example, be stored in the glove box or storage
compartment below the armrest. Sun visors
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 133
Useful features 133
Controls in detail
: Sun visor
X Opening: Briefly touch at top of cover :.
; Mounting
X Removing ashtray insert: Secure vehicle
= Vanity mirror cover
from movement by engaging the parking
? Vanity mirror lamps brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
Glare through the windshield neutral position N.
X Flip sun visor : down when you X Push sliding knob ; to the right.
experience glare. X Remove ashtray insert = from ashtray
frame.
Glare through a door window X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
X
insert = down into the ashtray frame until
Close vanity mirror cover = if opened.
it engages.
X Disengage sun visor : from
X Closing: Push at top of cover plate : to
mounting ;.
close ashtray.
X Pivot sun visor : to the side.
Rear door ashtray

Vanity mirror
The mirror lamp only functions when the sun
visor is engaged in mounting.
X Flip sun visor : down.
X Lift up vanity mirror cover =.
Vanity mirror lamps ? comes on.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
X Opening: Pull at top of cover ;
G Warning! X Removing ashtray insert: Push down on
Remove front ashtray insert only with vehicle catch :.
standing still.
X Pull out ashtray insert =.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 134
134 Useful features
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Position designed for use with the standard
ashtray insert =. “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
X Closing: Push at top of cover ;. however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive
connecting and disconnecting, or using
plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
Cigarette lighter
the lighter socket. With the socket
G Observe Safety notes, see page 44. damaged, the lighter may not function
Controls in detail
properly any longer.

G Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot. Power outlets
Hold the knob only.
The power outlets can be used to
Make sure that any children traveling with you accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
do not injure themselves or start a fire with (e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
the hot cigarette lighter. up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with Power outlet in front passenger
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s footwell
unsupervised access to a vehicle could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is

being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
Power outlet in rear center console

X Open the ashtray (Y page 133).
X Push in cigarette lighter :.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out
automatically when hot.
! The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W)
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 135
Useful features 135
Power outlet in cargo compartment monitoring services, connection and

cellular air time.
Rvehicle battery power is available.
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
information on to the Response Center.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
Controls in detail
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network and
pass the information on to the Response
Center.
If the engine is off and the power outlets are
being used extensively, the vehicle battery The Tele Aid system
may become discharged.
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
Tele Aid of response:
RAutomatic and manual emergency
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed. RRoadside Assistance
To ensure your system is activated and RInformation
operational, please press button E to
perform the acquaintance call. Failure to The Tele Aid system is operational providing
complete either of these steps may result that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly
in a system that is not activated. connected, not damaged, and cellular and
GPS coverage is available. The Tele Aid
If you have any questions regarding
system utilizes the cellular network for
activation, please call the Response Center
communication and the GPS (Global
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
location. If either of these signals are
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID function and if this occurs, assistance must
and password in the mail. You may use this be summoned by other means.
password to access the Tele Aid section in
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA i A Tele Aid call cannot be canceled. Even
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you if the Tele Aid system is not activated or
access to account information, remote door operational, the system will attempt to
unlock and more. connect the respective call. This may take
as long as 5 minutes or more. As long as
The Tele Aid system is available if
the Tele Aid system attempts to connect a
Rit has been activated and is operational. call, you cannot operate the audio system
Activation requires a subscription for or the COMAND system. Also, most
functions in the control system, such as the
telephone function, are suspended.
Therefore, it is not advisable to initiate any
Tele Aid call unless the Tele Aid system is
activated and operational.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 136
136 Useful features
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele Emergency calls

Aid call do the following:
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
X Press button W or X on the subscriber agreement must be completed.
multifunction steering wheel. To ensure your system is activated and
or operational, please press button E to
X Use the adjustment button on your perform the acquaintance call. Failure to
COMAND system. complete either of these steps may result
in a system that is not activated.
Controls in detail
System self-test If you have any questions regarding

activation, please call the Response Center
The system performs a self-test after you at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
have switched on the ignition. 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
G Warning! An emergency call is initiated automatically
A malfunction in the system has been following an accident in which the Emergency
detected if any or all of the following Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
conditions occur: An emergency call can also be initiated
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does manually (Y page 137).
not come on during the system self-test. Once the emergency call is in progress, the
RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
button º does not come on during the flash. The message Connecting Call
system self-test. appears in the multifunction display and the
RThe indicator lamp in Information button
COMAND system is muted. When the
E does not come on during the system
connection is established, the message
self-test.
Call Connected appears in the
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button, All information relevant to the emergency,
Roadside Assistance button º, or such as the location of the vehicle
Information button E remains (determined by the GPS satellite location
illuminated constantly in red after the system), vehicle model, identification number
system self-test. and color are generated.
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative A voice connection between the Response
appears in the multifunction display after Center and the occupants of the vehicle will
the system self-test. be established automatically soon after the
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, emergency call has been initiated. The
the system may not operate as expected. In Response Center will attempt to determine
case of an emergency, help will have to be the nature of the emergency more precisely,
summoned by other means. provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon immediately.
as possible.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 137
Useful features 137
G Warning! The Response Center will automatically

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is contact local emergency officials with the
flashing continuously and there was no voice vehicle’s approximate location if they receive
connection to the Response Center an automatic SOS signal and cannot make
established, then the Tele Aid system could voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
relevant cellular phone network is not Roadside Assistance button
available).
Controls in detail
X Open the storage tray (Y page 131).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
i The “911” emergency call system is a

public service. Using it without due cause
is a criminal offense.
Initiating an emergency call manually
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance

button : for longer than 2 seconds.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
Call will appear in the multifunction
display and the COMAND system is muted.
When the connection is established, the
X Briefly press on cover : to open. message Call Connected appears in the
X Press SOS button ; briefly. multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will transmit data generating the vehicle
flash until the emergency call is concluded. identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular and
X Wait for a voice connection to the
GPS signals).
Response Center.
X Close cover : after the emergency call is i The COMAND system display indicates
concluded. that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
G Warning! navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the button on the COMAND system. Spoken
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, commands are not available.
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please A voice connection between the Roadside
do not wait for voice contact after you have Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
pressed the emergency button. Carefully the vehicle will be established.
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 138
138 Useful features
X Describe the nature of the need for X Press and hold Information button : for
assistance. longer than 2 seconds.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance A call to the Customer Assistance Center
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow Information button : will flash while the
your vehicle to the nearest authorized call is in progress. The message
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as Connecting Call will appear in the
labor and/or towing, charges may apply. multifunction display and the COMAND
Controls in detail
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for system is muted.

more information. When the connection is established, the
Sign and Drive services (USA:only): message Call Connected appears in the
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with transmit data generating the vehicle
the vehicle spare tire are obtainable at no identification number, model, color and
charge. location (subject to availability of cellular and
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside GPS signals).
Assistance button : is flashing i The COMAND system display indicates
continuously and there was no voice that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
connection to the Response Center call is connected you can change to the
established, then the Tele Aid system could navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. button on the COMAND system. Spoken
the relevant cellular phone network is not commands are not available.
available). The message Call Failed A voice connection between the Customer
appears in the multifunction display. Assistance Center representative and the
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on occupants of the vehicle will be established.
the multifunction steering wheel. Information regarding the operation of your
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-
or Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
X Press the respective button for ending a and services is available to you.
telephone call on the COMAND system. For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
Information button only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
X Open the storage tray (Y page 131). “My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
i If the indicator lamp in Information
button : is flashing continuously and
there was no voice connection to the
Response Center established, then the Tele
Aid system could not initiate an Information
call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone
network is not available). The message
Call Failed appears in the multifunction
display.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 139
Useful features 139
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on i If you select No, you can save the address
the multifunction steering wheel. to your address book.
or
i The Destination Download feature is
X Press the respective button for ending a
available if the relevant mobile phone
telephone call on the COMAND system.
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Call priority
Controls in detail
If other service calls such as a Roadside Search and Send
Assistance call or Information call are active, “Search & Send” is a navigation destination
an emergency call is still possible. In this address entry service. For more information
case, the emergency call will take priority and on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
override all other active calls. COMAND system operating instructions.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency Remote door unlock
calls can only be terminated by a Response
Center or Customer Assistance Center In case you have locked your vehicle
representative. All other calls can be unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
terminated by pressing button ~ on the and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
multifunction steering wheel or the X Contact the Response Center at
respective button for ending a telephone call 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
on the COMAND system. 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password.
Destination Download to the COMAND X Then return to your vehicle at the time
system arranged with the Response Center and
press the tailgate lock for a minimum of
i The components and operating principles 20 seconds until the indicator lamp in the
of the COMAND system can be found in the SOS button is flashing.
separate COMAND operating instructions. The message Connecting Call appears in
Destination Download allows you access to a the multifunction display.
database of over 10 million points of interest As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
(POIs) that can be downloaded to your via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the “Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
destination, the address can be downloaded, (USA only).
or can be provided with points of interests The Response Center will then unlock your
near your location. vehicle with the remote door unlocking
The Response Center can transmit feature.
destination data to the COMAND system
during the connection with the Roadside i The remote door unlock feature is
Assistance or Customer Assistance Center. available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.
The transmitted data can contain address
details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs. The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting Call will appear in the
Route guidance multifunction display to indicate receipt of
The system calculates the route and the door unlock command.
subsequently starts the route guidance to the
defined address.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 140
140 Useful features
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response G Warning!

Center specialist will attempt to establish Before programming the integrated remote
voice contact with the vehicle occupants. control to a garage door opener or gate
If the tailgate lock was pressed for more operator, make sure people and objects are
than 20 seconds before door unlock out of the way of the device to prevent
authorization was received by the potential harm or damage. When
Response Center, you must wait programming a garage door opener, the door
15 minutes before pressing the tailgate moves up or down. When programming a gate
Controls in detail
lock again. operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
In the event your vehicle was stolen: and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
X Report the incident to the police. garage door opener model manufactured
The police will issue a numbered incident before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
report. cannot detect an object - signaling the door
X Pass this number on to the Response to stop and reverse - does not meet current
Center along with your password. U.S. federal safety standards.
The Response Center will then attempt to When programming a garage door opener,
covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid park vehicle outside the garage.
system. Once the vehicle is located, the
Do not run the engine while programming the
Response Center will contact the local law
integrated remote control. Inhalation of
enforcement and you. The vehicle’s
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
location will only be provided to law
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
enforcement.
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more and possible death.
than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system
initiates a call to the Response Center
automatically The Tele Aid system will
initiate the call provided that
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
properly
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
supply and GPS coverage are available
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control
Garage door opener
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the
The integrated remote control can operate up vehicle equipment.
to three separately controlled devices
compatible with HomeLink® or some other
systems.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 141
Useful features 141
Programming the integrated remote release the hand-held remote control

control button and the signal transmitter button.
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
observe indicator lamp :.
a signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device
or
should activate when the respective signal
Controls in detail
X If you are programming the integrated
transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
remote control for the first time, press and and released.
hold the two outer signal transmitter
buttons ; and ? and release them when i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
indicator lamp : begins to flash after approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
approximately 20 seconds. a constant light, continue with
Do not hold the button for longer than programming steps 8 through 12 as your
30 seconds. garage door opener may be equipped with
This procedure erases any previous the “rolling code” feature.
settings for all three channels and X Step 7: To program the remaining two
initializes the memory. If you later wish to signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
program a second and/or third hand-held above starting with step 3.
transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step Rolling code programming
and begin directly with step 3. To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote code devices) with the rolling code feature,
control A of the device you wish to train follow these instructions after completing the
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
from the signal transmitter button (;, = this text. A second person may make the
or ?) to be programmed, while keeping following training procedures quicker and
indicator lamp : in view. easier.
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
press hand-held remote control button B garage door opener motor head unit.
and the desired signal transmitter button i Exact location and color of the button may
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons vary by garage door opener brand.
until step 5 is completed. Depending on manufacturer, the “training”
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and button may also be referred to as “learn” or
then rapidly. “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual.
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
been programmed, the indicator lamp will garage door opener motor head unit.
start flashing after 20 seconds. The “training light” is activated.
X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes You have 30 seconds to initiate the
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, following two steps.
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 142
142 Useful features
programmed signal transmitter button remote control until the frequency signal
(;, = or ?). has been learned.
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and Upon successful training, indicator
release same signal transmitter button a lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
second time to complete the training after several seconds.
process. X Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other
Controls in detail
rolling code equipped devices) may require i Upon completion of programming the
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and integrated remote control, make sure you
release the same signal transmitter button retain the hand-held remote control that
a third time to complete the training came with the garage door opener, gate
process. operator or other device. You may need it
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door for use in other vehicles, for future
operation by pressing the programmed programming of an integrated remote
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?). control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
respective device in other situations.
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Reprogramming a single signal
Gate operator/Canadian programming transmitter button
Canadian radio-frequency laws require To program a device using a signal
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) transmitter button previously trained, follow
after several seconds of transmission which these steps:
may not be long enough for the integrated X Switch on the ignition.
signal transmitter to pick up the signal during X Press and hold the desired signal
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
release the button.
“time-out” in the same manner.
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after
If you live in Canada or if you are having 20 seconds.
difficulties programming a gate operator
X Without releasing the signal transmitter
(regardless of where you live) by using the
button, proceed with programming starting
programming procedures, replace step 4 with
with step 3.
the following:
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
Operation of integrated remote control
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
release this button until it has been X Switch on the ignition.
successfully trained. X Select and press the appropriate
X While still holding down the signal integrated signal transmitter button (;,
transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle” = or ?) to activate the remote controlled
your hand-held remote control button B device.
as follows: Press and hold button B for The integrated remote control transmitter
2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, continues to send the signal as long as the
and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 143
Useful features 143
Erasing the integrated remote control i Certain types of garage door openers are
memory incompatible with the integrated remote
control. If you should experience further
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of difficulties with programming the
all three channels. integrated remote control, contact an
X Switch on the ignition. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for Center (in the USA) at
Controls in detail
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator
Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds. i USA only:
The codes of all three channels are erased. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
Programming tips following two conditions:
If you are having difficulty programming the 1. This device may not cause harmful
integrated remote control, here are some interference, and
helpful tips: 2. this device must accept any
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote interference received, including
control A (typically located on the reverse interference that may cause undesired
side of the remote). The integrated remote operation.
control is compatible with radio-frequency Any unauthorized modification to this
devices operating between 280-390 MHz. device could void the user’s authority to
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote operate the equipment.
control A. This will increase the likelihood
i Canada only:
of the hand-held remote control sending a
faster and more accurate signal to the This device complies with RSS-210 of
integrated remote control. Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
remote control A at different lengths and 1. This device may not cause interference,
and
angles from the signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?) you are programming. 2. this device must accept any
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 interference received, including
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same interference that may cause undesired
angle at varying distances. operation of the device.
RIf another hand-held remote control is Any unauthorized modification to this
available for the same device, try the device could void the user’s authority to
programming steps again using that other operate the equipment.
hand-held remote control. Make sure new
batteries are in the hand-held remote
control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
signals.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 144
144 Useful features
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened
using the fastening equipment.
Controls in detail
Before driving off, check that the floormats

are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
i To install or remove the floormat more

easily, move the driver’s seat or front
passenger seat as far to the rear as
possible.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 145
145
Vehicle equipment ............................ 146

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 146
At the gas station ............................. 146
Engine compartment ........................ 148
Tires and wheels ............................... 154
Winter driving ................................... 175
Driving instructions .......................... 176
Maintenance ...................................... 185
Vehicle care ....................................... 187
Operation
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 146
146 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment has been performed. Please refer to

Maintenance Booklet.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all All of the above instructions, as may apply to
features, standard or optional, potentially your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
available for your vehicle at the time of first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine,
purchase. Please be aware that your the transfer case, the front differential or the
vehicle might not be equipped with all rear differential has been replaced.
features described in this manual.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Operation
At the gas station

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
Refueling
during the break-in period, the more satisfied
you will be with its performance later on. G Warning!
RDrive your vehicle during the first Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but It burns violently and can cause serious
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. personal injury.
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
throttle driving) and excessive engine materials near gasoline!
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm Turn off the engine before refueling.
in each gear). Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
RShift gears in a timely manner. inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
RAvoid accelerating by kickdown.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
shifting to a lower gear using the gear health.
selector lever.
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 89) G Warning!
only when driving at moderate speeds (for Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
hill driving). pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may spray back out when removing the fuel pump
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
to the permissible maximum.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles: ! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km), with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and
(140 km/h). engine. Damage resulting from the use of
non-approved fuels or fuel additives or
RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel
above 4 500 rpm in each gear. fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
RShift gears in a timely manner. Limited Warranty.
RAvoid off-road driving during the break-in
! If you have accidentally filled the tank
period until the oil change in the front
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
and rear axle at 2000 miles (3000 km)
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 147
At the gas station 147
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the

incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
drained completely. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
system drained completely.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic

converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
Operation
operation should be repaired promptly. X Turn off the engine.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
overheat and potentially start a fire. filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with malfunction indicator lamp = (USA
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 only) or ; (Canada only) to illuminate.
(average of 96 RON/86 MON). For more information, see also “Practical
Information on gasoline quality can hints” (Y page 218).
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found. switch.
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
For more information on gasoline, see
“Premium unleaded gasoline” point indicated by the arrow.
(Y page 254), see “Fuel requirements” X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
(Y page 255), or contact an authorized X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only). ! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
side of the vehicle towards the rear. damage the vehicle paint finish.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrow
SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the into the holder.
fuel filler flap. X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
i In case the central locking system does X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
flap” (Y page 223).
! When refueling the vehicle, make certain
that no gasoline comes into contact with
the rear side marker to prevent damaging
the lens.
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
until it audibly engages.
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap
before locking your vehicle as the flap
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 148
148 Engine compartment
locking pin prevents closing after you have G Warning!

locked the vehicle. You could be injured when the hood is open –
X Close fuel filler flap :. even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
Check regularly and before a long trip before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
For information on quantities and
precautions.
requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 252). G Warning!
Check the following:
Operation
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of

REngine oil level (Y page 149) moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 156)
The radiator fan may continue to run for
RCoolant level (Y page 152) approximately 30 seconds or may even
RVehicle lighting (Y page 226) restart after the engine has been turned off.
RWasher system and headlamp cleaning Stay clear of fan blades.
system (Y page 153)
G Warning!
RBrake fluid (Y page 152) The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
Engine compartment (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
Hood
Rwith the engine running
G Warning! Rwhile starting the engine
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow. engine is turned manually
This could cause the hood to come loose and
injure you and/or others.
Opening
G Warning!
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the engine
is overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call
the fire department. X Pull hood lock release lever :.
The hood is unlocked.
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers
or hood, never open the hood if the wiper
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 149
Engine compartment 149
arms are folded forward away from the Engine oil

windshield.
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
Operation
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
X Lift hood up slightly. Warranty.
X Push safety hook ; in direction of arrow. For further information contact an
X Pull up on hood. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The hood will be automatically held open at
shoulder height by gas-filled struts. Notes on checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle must
Closing
be parked on level ground.
G Warning! G 550: The vehicle must have been stationary
When closing the hood, use extreme caution for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that off.
you do not close the hood on anyone. G 55 AMG: With the engine at operating
Make sure the hood is securely engaged temperature, the vehicle must have been
before driving off. Do not continue driving if stationary for at least 5 minutes with the
the hood can no longer engage after an engine turned off.
accident, for example. The hood could With the engine not at operating temperature,
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in the vehicle must have been stationary for at
motion and injure you and/or others. least 30 minutes with the engine turned off.
X Let the hood drop from a height of Checking engine oil level with the oil
approximately 1 ft (30 cm). dipstick
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
On the G 550, you can check the engine oil
closed. level with the oil dipstick.
If you can raise the hood at a point above X Open the hood (Y page 148).
the turn signals to the left and right of the
hood, then it is not properly closed. Open
it again and let it drop with somewhat
greater force.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 150
150
Operation Engine compartment
X Pull out oil dipstick :. One of the following messages will

subsequently appear in the multifunction
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
display:
X Fully insert oil dipstick : into the dipstick
REngine Oil
guide tube.
Level
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
OK
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
RAdd
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between 1.0 qt
lower (min) mark = and upper (max) to reach
mark ; of oil dipstick :. maximum
oil level.
i The filling quantity between the upper and (Canada: 1.0 liter)
lower marks on the oil dipstick is RAdd
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). 1.5 qts
X If necessary, add engine oil. to reach
maximum
For more information on engine oil, see
oil level.
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Canada: 1.5 liters)
(Y page 252).
RAdd
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil, 2.0 qts
see the “Practical hints” section to reach
(Y page 207). maximum
oil level.
Checking engine oil level with the (Canada: 2.0 liters)
control system i If you want to interrupt the checking
On the G 55 AMG, you can check the engine procedure, press button * or & on
oil level with the control system. the multifunction steering wheel.
X Switch on the ignition. X If necessary, add engine oil.
The standard display appears in the For more information on engine oil, see
multifunction display (Y page 99). “Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
X Press button * or & on the (Y page 252).
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the following message appears in the
multifunction display:
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 151
Other display messages For information on messages in the

If the ignition is not switched on, the following multifunction display concerning engine oil,
message appears in the multifunction see the “Practical hints” section
display: (Y page 207).
Switch
ignition on to Adding engine oil
check engine ! Only use approved engine oils and oil
oil level. filters required for vehicles with
X Switch on the ignition. Maintenance System. For a listing of
If you see the message: approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
Operation
Observe an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Waiting Time visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
X If the engine is at operating temperature, Using engine oils and oil filters of
wait 5 minutes before repeating check specification other than those expressly
procedure. required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change
X If the engine is not at operating
intervals longer than those called for by the
temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
Maintenance System will result in engine or
before checking oil.
emission control system damage not
If you see the message: covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Engine Oil Warranty.
Level
Not With
Engine On
X If the engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before checking oil.
X If the engine is not at operating
temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine at
normal operating temperature, the following
message appears in the multifunction G 550
display:
Engine Oil
Reduce Oil
Level
X Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. G 55 AMG
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 152
152 Engine compartment
X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. Coolant level

X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
to overfill with oil. anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil must be parked on level ground, and the
entering the ground or water. coolant temperature must be below 158‡
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained (70†).
off. It could cause damage to the engine
G Warning!
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
Operation
RUse extreme caution when opening the

X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck. hood if there are any signs of steam or
For more information on engine oil, see the coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
“Technical data” section (Y page 252) and if the coolant temperature gauge indicates
(Y page 253). that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is above
Brake fluid level
158‡ (70†). Allow engine to cool down
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake before removing cap. The coolant reservoir
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum contains hot fluid and is under pressure.
mark or below, have the brake system RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
immediately. Contact an authorized pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do hot fluid and steam will be blown out under
not add brake fluid as this will not solve the pressure.
problem. For more information, see
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
“Practical hints”.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
When checking the brake fluid level, the may burn if it comes into contact with hot
vehicle must be parked on level ground. engine parts.
The brake fluid level is correct when it is

between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 153
X Using a rag, turn cap : slowly

approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
to release any excess pressure.
X Continue turning cap : counterclockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Rfor cold coolant: reaches the top of the
mark (plastic bridge) in coolant
expansion tank ;
Operation
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
Fluid for the washer system, rear window
(1.5 cm) higher
washer system, and the headlamp cleaning
X Add coolant as required. system is supplied from the washer fluid
X Attach and tighten cap :. reservoir.
For more information on coolant, see the During all seasons, add MB Windshield
“Technical data” section (Y page 253) and Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
(Y page 255). water. Premix the washer fluid in a suitable
container.
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
Washer system and headlamp of cap : upwards.
cleaning system X Refill the washer fluid reservoir with MB
G Warning! Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
SummerFit” and water (or commercially
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
available premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
antifreeze, depending on ambient
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
temperatures) (Y page 257).
burned. X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze For more information, see “Washer system
where temperatures may fall below and headlamp cleaning system”
freezing point. Failure to do so could result (Y page 253).
in damage to the washer system/fluid
reservoir.
Transmission fluid level
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
The transmission fluid level does not need to
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
damage the plastic lenses of the
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
headlamps.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in transmission.
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 154
154 Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Safety notes tire dealer for repairs.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended G Warning!
rims and tires for summer and winter Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
operation. They can also offer advice the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
concerning tire service and purchase. could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
G Warning! with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
Replace rims or tires with the same up and possibly a fire.
Operation
designation, manufacturer and type as shown

on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Important guidelines
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the type and make.
operating clearance of the wheels and the RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
tires may no longer be correct.
RBreak in new tires for approximately
G Warning! 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire RRegularly check the tires and rims for
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
the tires have sustained damage, replace inflation pressure loss and damage to the
them. tire beads.
When replacing rims, only use genuine RIf vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the inflation pressure and correct as required.
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
accident.
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
Retreaded tires are not tested or than 1/8 in (3 mm).
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
recognized on retreads. The operating safety mount new tires on the front wheels first
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
tires are used. around).
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or Recommended tire inflation pressure
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you G Warning!
should turn on the hazard warning flashers, Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
an area which is a safe distance from the road. wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody affect handling and fuel economy, and are
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires more likely to fail from being overheated.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 155
Tires and wheels 155
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can In addition to the Tire and Loading
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, Information placard on the driver’s door
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) pressure label (if available) on the inside of
because they are more likely to become the filler flap for any additional information
punctured or damaged by road debris, pertaining to special driving situations. For
potholes etc. more information, see “Important notes on
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the tire inflation pressure” (Y page 155).
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire i Data shown on Tire and Loading
and Loading Information placard on the Information placard example are for
Operation
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires illustration purposes only. Tire data are
can overheat them, possibly causing a specific to each vehicle and may vary from
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result data shown in the following illustration.
in handling or steering problems, or brake Refer to Tire and Loading Information
failure. placard on vehicle for actual data specific
to your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 161).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
temperature, the driving speed and the tire
load, the tire temperature changes. When the
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in the recommended cold tire inflation
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the apply to the tires installed as original
current operating conditions. If you check the equipment.
tire inflation pressure when the tires are
warm, the reading will be higher than the cold Important notes on tire inflation
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to pressure
match the specified cold tire inflation
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be G Warning!
underinflated. If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
Follow recommended cold tire inflation check the tires for punctures from foreign
pressures listed on Tire and Loading objects and/or whether air is leaking from the
Information placard on the driver’s door valves or from around the rim.
B-pillar.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides are also increased while driving, depending
the best handling, tread life and riding on the driving speed and the tire load.
comfort.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 156
If you will be driving your vehicle at high Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, Radversely affect handling characteristics
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside Overinflated tires
of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to
adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you G Warning!
do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
excessive heat can build up and result in Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
sudden tire failure. adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
inflation pressure label on the inside of the and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
Operation
fuel filler flap, contact an authorized because they are more likely to become
Mercedes-Benz Center for proper tire punctured or damaged by road debris,
inflation pressure. potholes etc.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the Overinflated tires can

tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the Radversely affect handling characteristics
value for speeds above 100 mph
Rcause uneven tire wear
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the Rbe more prone to damage from road
fuel filler flap. hazards
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation Radversely affect ride comfort
pressure for normal driving speeds. Rincrease stopping distance
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle Checking tire inflation pressure
condition. If such information is provided, it
can be found on the tire inflation pressure Safety notes
label located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Potential problems associated with Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
underinflated and overinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
Underinflated tires more likely to fail from being overheated.
G Warning! Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated.
potholes etc.
Underinflated tires can Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
Radversely affect fuel economy driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 157
can overheat them, possibly causing a The TPMS is equipped with a combination low
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale
in handling or steering problems, or brake (USA) or a low tire pressure telltale (Canada)
failure. in the instrument cluster. Depending on how
the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every pressure condition or a malfunction in the
other week. TPMS system itself:
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
when the tires are cold (Y page 155). or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. There is no malfunction in
Checking tire inflation pressure
Operation
the TPMS.
manually
RUSA only: If the telltale flashes for 60
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire seconds and then stays illuminated, the
inflation pressure: TPMS system itself is not operating
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. properly.
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve. The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
gauge and check against the G Warning!
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 161). If
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the
necessary, add air to achieve the
Tire and Loading Information placard or, if
recommended tire inflation pressure.
available, on the supplemental tire inflation
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
pressure information on the inside of the fuel
inflation pressure by pushing the metal filler flap.
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire
with the tire gauge.
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
X Install the valve cap.
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
X Repeat this procedure for each tire. applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
steering maneuvers.
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS) G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced should be checked every other week when
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
in the vehicle’s tires and issue warnings in on the Tire and Loading Information placard
case of pressure loss in one or more of the on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the
tires. tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 158
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has If a condition causing the TPMS to
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring malfunction develops, it may take up to
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire 10 minutes for the system to signal a
pressure telltale when one or more of your malfunction using the TPMS telltale
tires are significantly underinflated. flashing and illumination sequence.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure The telltale extinguishes after a few
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check minutes driving if the malfunction has been
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate corrected.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire multifunction display. The current tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Operation
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency multifunction display after a few minutes of
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s driving.
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire i Possible differences between the
maintenance, and it is the driver’s readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
responsibility to maintain correct tire hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
pressure, even if underinflation has not vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire
reached the level to trigger illumination of the pressure displayed by the control system
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. apply to sea level. In high-altitude
locations, the reading on a tire pressure
USA only:
gauge will be higher than the reading issued
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
reduce the tire inflation pressure under
the system is not operating properly. The
such circumstances.
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the X Switch on the ignition.
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will X Press button V or U on the
flash for approximately 1 minute and then multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
remain continuously illuminated. This until the standard display appears in the
sequence will continue upon subsequent multifunction display (Y page 99).
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
X Press button & or * until the current
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to inflation pressure for each tire appears in
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. the multifunction display.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
i USA only: When the vehicle has been parked for longer
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 159
pressure displayed only after

driving for a few minutes. appears in
the multifunction display.
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
of the removed road wheel for some
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
the indicated value where the spare wheel
is mounted does not reflect the actual
spare tire inflation pressure.
Operation
i USA only: The respective tire is indicated by a red
rectangle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the Restarting Advanced TPMS
following two conditions:
G Warning!
1. This device may not cause harmful It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
interference, and inflation pressure to the recommended cold
2. this device must accept any tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
interference received, including affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
interference that may cause undesired. You might lose control over the vehicle.
Any unauthorized modification to this When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
device could void the user’s authority to new reference values for each tire.
operate the equipment.
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
i Canada only: adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
This device complies with RSS-210 of level (e.g. because of different load or driving
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
the following two conditions: the current tire inflation pressures.
1. This device may not cause interference, i Canada only:

and The TPMS usually recognizes tire pressure
adjustments and sets new reference values
2. this device must accept any automatically. You can, however, restart
interference received, including the TPMS manually as described.
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
Any unauthorized modification to this recommended for the vehicle operating
device could void the user’s authority to condition. Tire pressure should only be
operate the equipment. adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
Tire inflation pressure warnings recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have
inflation pressure in one or more than one
supplemental tire pressure information for
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition.
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
If such information is provided, it can be
instrument cluster comes on.
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 160
X Press button & or * repeatedly until is mounted does not reflect the actual
you see the current inflation pressure for spare tire inflation pressure.
each tire appear in the display or the
following message appears in the
multifunction display: Maximum tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure
G Warning!
displayed
only after Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
driving for pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
a few minutes. pressures.
X Press the reset button (Y page 95). Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Operation
The following message will appear in the wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
multifunction display: affect handling and fuel economy, and are
Restart more likely to fail from being overheated.
Tire Pres. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
Monitor? adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
X If you wish to confirm: Press button wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
W. and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
The following message will appear in the
punctured or damaged by road debris,
multifunction display:
potholes etc.
Tire Pres.
Monitor
Restarted
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s specified
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
pressures are accepted as reference values
and then monitored.
X If you wish to cancel: Press button
X.
i When the wheel positions have been
changed, the air pressure of a tire may be i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
displayed for the wrong position on tires are specific to each vehicle and
temporarily. After driving for a few minutes, may vary from data shown in above
the air pressure will be shown for the illustration.
correct position. This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation
of the removed road wheel for some pressure (Y page 154) for proper tire
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that inflation.
the indicated value where the spare wheel
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 161
Loading the vehicle Tire and Loading Information

Two labels on your vehicle show how much G Warning!
weight it may properly carry. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
can be found on the driver’s door and Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar. This placard tells you important driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
information about the number of people can overheat them, possibly causing a
that can be in the vehicle and the total blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
weight that can be carried in the vehicle. in handling or steering problems, or brake
It also contains information on the proper failure.
Operation
size and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment tires Tire and Loading Information placard
on your vehicle.
(2) The certification label, also found on the
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the Information placard example are for
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, illustration purposes only. Load limit data
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating are specific to each vehicle and may vary
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight from data shown in the following
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
cargo. The certification label also tells Information placard on vehicle for actual
you about the front and rear axle weight data specific to your vehicle.
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
The Tire and Loading Information placard

showing load limit information : is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 161).
X Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on the Tire and Loading Information
: Driver’s door B-pillar placard.
Following is a discussion on how to work with The combined weight of all occupants,
the information contained on the Tire and cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
Loading Information placard with regards to applicable) should never exceed the weight
loading your vehicle. referenced in that statement.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 162
Seating capacity X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
Operation
the available cargo and luggage load

The seating capacity gives you important capacity calculated in step 4.
information on the number of occupants that X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
Information placard showing seating this manual to determine how this reduces
capacity : is located on the driver’s door the available cargo and luggage load
B-pillar (Y page 161). capacity of your vehicle (Y page 164).
i Data shown on Tire and Loading The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
Information placard example are for
with varying seating configurations and
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
number and size of occupants. The following
data are specific to each vehicle and may
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
vary from data shown in the following
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual you are using the actual load limit for your
data specific to your vehicle. vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 162).
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 163
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1
rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 164). (Y page 164) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 164
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Maximum tire load
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and G Warning!
GAWR from the certification label. The Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
certification label can be found on the driver’s specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section and Loading Information placard on the
(Y page 246). driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The can overheat them, possibly causing a
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if in handling or steering problems, or brake
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR. failure.
Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total

allowable weight that can be carried by a
single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible weight limits
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
have the loaded vehicle (including driver,
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load

i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
The tongue load of any trailer is an important on tires are specific to each vehicle and
weight to measure because it affects the load may vary from data shown in above
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is illustration.
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo The maximum tire load rating : is the
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue maximum weight the tires are designed to
load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and support.
everything loaded in it. For more information on tire load rating, see
If an approved Mercedes-Benz trailer hitch is (Y page 169).
available for your G-Class vehicle model, For information on calculating total and cargo
consult the instructions included in the trailer load capacities, see (Y page 162).
hitch kit for vehicle towing capacity,
permissible gross trailer weight, trailer
tongue weight rating, and instructions on Direction of rotation
loading and towing a trailer. Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 165
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or Life of tire

replaced. Always observe and follow
applicable temporary use restrictions and G Warning!
speed limitations indicated on the spare Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
wheel. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon

varying factors including but not limited to:
Tire care and maintenance
RDriving style
G Warning! RTire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tires for damage.
Operation
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation RDistance driven
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. Tread depth
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if G Warning!
the tires have sustained damage, replace Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
them. safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
other week. For more information on recommend that you do not allow your tires
checking tire inflation pressure, see to wear down to that level. As tread depth
“Recommended tire inflation pressure” approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
(Y page 154).
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Tire inspection
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Every time you check the tire inflation widely.
pressure, you should also inspect your tires
for the following: Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 165) reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s (3 mm).
rubber Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the law. These indicators are located in six places
tread or side of the tire on the tread circumference and become
Replace the tire if you find any of the above visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
conditions. 16
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire considered worn and should be replaced.
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare The recommended minimum tire tread depth
tires will age and become worn over time even for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
if never used, and thus should be inspected recommended minimum tire tread depth for
and replaced when necessary. winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 166
based on three performance factors:

treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
Operation
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid Quality grades can be found, where

band across the tread. applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
Storing tires example:
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place Treadwear Traction Temperature
with as little exposure to light as possible. 200 AA A
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
All passenger car tires must conform to
Cleaning tires federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in Treadwear
damage to the tire.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Always replace a damaged tire. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
Uniform Tire Quality Grading tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Standards (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Government requirement designed to give based on straight-ahead braking traction
drivers consistent and reliable information tests, and does not include acceleration,
regarding tire performance. Tire cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
manufacturers are required to grade tires characteristics.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 167
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the generation of heat and its ability to
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent dissipate heat when tested under controlled
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
measured under controlled conditions on test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
specified government test surfaces of asphalt cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor and reduce tire life, and excessive
traction performance. temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
G Warning! performance which all passenger car tires
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
be substantially reduced. Under such weather Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
Operation
conditions, drive, steer and brake with represent higher levels of performance on the
extreme caution. laboratory test wheel than the minimum
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy required by law.
road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
Rotating tires
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point. G Warning!
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
(Y page 175) with a minimum tread depth of are of the same dimension.
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
for the winter season to ensure normal tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
balanced handling characteristics. On tire rotation is not possible.
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping
distance compared to summer tires. G Warning!
Stopping distance, however, is still Have the tightening torque checked after
considerably greater than when the road is changing a wheel. Wheels could become
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise loose if not tightened with a torque of
appropriate caution. 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
cause serious damage to the drivetrain specified for your vehicle’s rims.
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
Limited Warranty. with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
Temperature same dimension all around, tires can be
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
G Warning!
pattern that will maintain the intended
The temperature grade for this tire is
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
established for a tire that is properly inflated
(Y page 164).
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
separately or in combination, can cause equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
excessive heat build-up and possible tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
failure. possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
The temperature grades are A (the highest), configuration, tires can be rotated according
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 168
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended = Maximum tire load (Y page 164)

intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty ? Maximum tire inflation pressure
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature (Y page 160)
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be A Manufacturer
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according B Tire ply material (Y page 172)
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation C Tire size designation, load and speed
(spinning) direction must be maintained. rating (Y page 168)
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire D Load identification (Y page 171)
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear E Tire name
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
Operation
tires). i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels on tires are specific to each vehicle and
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the may vary from data shown in above
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for illustration.
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. For more information, see “Rims and tires”
For information on wheel change, see “Flat (Y page 250).
tire” (Y page 232).
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in %
= Radial tire code
? Rim diameter
A Tire load rating
B Tire speed rating

illustration.
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
General: Depending on the design standards
(Y page 166)
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
; DOT, Tire Identification Number may have no letter or a letter preceding the
(Y page 171) tire size designation.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 169
No letter preceding the size designation (as tire failure may be the result which may cause
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based an accident and/or serious injury to you or
on European design standards. others.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Always replace rims and tires with the same
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design designation, manufacturer and type as shown
standards. on the original part.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design G Warning!
standards. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Operation
Temporary spare tires which are high and Loading Information placard on the
pressure compact spares designed for driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
temporary emergency use only. can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
Tire width in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width failure.
in millimeters.
Tire load rating A is a numerical code
Aspect ratio associated with the maximum load a tire can
Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional support.
relationship between tire section height and For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
section width and is expressed in percentage. to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing tire is designed to support. See also
section height by section width. “Maximum tire load” (Y page 164) where the
maximum load associated with the load index
Tire code is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
Tire code = indicates the tire construction For additional information on tire load rating,
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter see “Load identification” (Y page 171).
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. Tire speed rating
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire G Warning!
with a speed capability above 149 mph Even when permitted by law, never operate a
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For speed rating of the tires.
additional information, see “Tire speed Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
rating” (Y page 169). are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
Rim diameter causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
resulting in an accident and/or serious
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
personal injury and possible death, for you
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
and for others.
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
Tire load rating
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
G Warning! driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
The tire load rating must always be at least conditions.
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, Tire speed rating B indicates the approved
maximum speed for the tire.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 170
Summer tires in the size designation AND the service

description must be placed in parenthesis.
Index Speed rating
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) speed rating in parenthesis designates the
maximum speed capability of the tire as
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) All-season and winter tires
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Index Speed rating
Operation
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

Q M+S8
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
T M+S8 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
H M+S8 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
V M+S8 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the tires
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire you use show M+S and the mountain/
with a speed capability above 149 mph snowflakeimarking on the tire
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). traction performance requirements of the
To determine the maximum speed Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
capability of the tire, the service and the Rubber Association of Canada
description for the tire must be referred to. (RAC) and have been designed specifically
The service description is comprised of tire for use in snow conditions.
load rating A and tire speed rating B. An electronic speed limiter prevents your
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
designation and no service description is (210 km/h).
given, the tire manufacturer must be The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
consulted for the maximum speed may have a tire speed rating above the
capability. maximum speed permitted by the electronic
If a service description is given, the speed speed limiter.
capability is limited by the speed symbol in Make sure your tires have the required tire
the service description. Example: speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” the “Technical data” section (Y page 250),
is the service description. The letter “Y” for example when purchasing new tires.
designates the speed rating and the speed If you are uncertain about the correct reading
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
(300 km/h).
RAny tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
8 or M+Sifor winter tires
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 171
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be

glad to assist you.
Load identification
Operation
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates
efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other safety
matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such
tires.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
on tires are specific to each vehicle and identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
may vary from data shown in above type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
illustration. A.
In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification : may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating the
tire speed rating B (Y page 168).
illustration.
RNo specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a DOT (Department of Transportation)
standard load (SL) tire.
RXL
Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire. meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
RLight Load: designates a light load tire.
RC, D, E: designates load range associated Manufacturer’s identification mark
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
Manufacturer’s identification mark ;
a specified pressure.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire tires, see (Y page 154).
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. Tire size
Code = indicates the tire size.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 172
Tire type code Tire and loading terminology

Tire type code ? may, at the option of the Accessory weight
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of The combined weight (in excess of those
the tire. standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
Date of manufacture power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
The date of manufacture A identifies the items are available as factory-installed
week and year of manufacture. equipment (whether installed or not).
Operation
The first two figures identify the week,

starting with “01” to represent the first full Air pressure
week of the calendar year. The second two
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
figures represent the year.
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd pressure is expressed in pounds per square
week of 2002. inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar.
Aspect ratio
Tire ply material
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed
in percentage.
Bar
Another metric unit for air pressure. There are
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
may vary from data shown in above Cold tire inflation pressure
illustration.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
This marking tells you about the type of cord
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
and number of plies in the sidewall : and
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
under the tread ;.
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
air conditioning and additional optional
equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 173
DOT (Department of Transportation) Maximum load rating

A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
meets requirements of the U.S. Department that can be carried by the tire.
of Transportation.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle total load limit, and production options
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle weight.
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
and rear axle indicated on the certification Maximum permissible tire inflation
Operation
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc. Normal occupant weight
loaded on the trailer.
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
(150 lb).
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed Occupant distribution
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the their designated seating positions.
certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) regular production options weighing over
This is the maximum permissible vehicle 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of standard items which they replace, not
the vehicle including all options, passengers, previously considered in curb weight or
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer accessory weight, including heavy duty
tongue load). It is indicated on certification brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. battery, and special trim.
Kilopascal (kPa) PSI (Pounds per square inch)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals Recommended tire inflation pressure
(kPa) to 1 bar. The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar and provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so
equipped, supplemental information
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 174
pertaining to special driving situations can be Total load limit

found on the tire inflation pressure label on
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
the inside of the fuel filler flap.
68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube Traction
assembly upon which the tire beads are
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via
seated.
the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Sidewall
Tread
Operation
The portion of a tire between the tread and

The portion of a tire that comes into contact
the bead.
with the road.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Treadwear indicators
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
that show across the tread of a tire when only
recall situations or other safety matters 1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
concerning tires and gives purchasers the 16
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is

comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date Maximum permissible weight on trailer
of manufacture”. tongue.
Tire load rating Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

Numerical code associated with the A tire information system that provides
maximum load a tire can support. consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
Tire ply composition and material used determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
This indicates the number of plies or the government testing procedures. The ratings
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply Vehicle maximum load on the tire
materials in the tire and sidewall, which Load on an individual tire that is determined
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
Tire speed rating it by two.
Part of tire designation; indicates the speed
range for which a tire is approved.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 175
Winter driving 175
Winter driving Always observe the speed rating of the winter

tires installed on your vehicle.
General information
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Snow chains
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
Winter tires serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
G Warning! make sure the use of snow chains is
permissible as specified in the “Technical
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
Operation
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
6
longer suitable for winter operation. Snow chains should only be driven on snow-
covered roads at speeds not to exceed
G Warning! 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires as possible when driving on roads without
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that snow.
the difference in tire characteristics may very Observe the following guidelines when using
well impair turning stability and that overall snow chains:
driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
driving style accordingly. all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 250).
Have the spare wheel replaced by regular RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
Always use winter tires at temperatures ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
wheels, they may scrape against the body
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
provide special winter performance. Make
could be damaged as a result.
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall. ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
These tires meet specific snow traction Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
performance requirements of the Rubber Benz Center will be glad to advise you on
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the this subject.
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
have been designed specifically for use in depending on location. Always check local
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the and state laws before installing snow
only way to achieve the maximum chains.
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in i When driving with snow chains, you may
winter operation. wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 52)
For safe handling, make sure all mounted before setting the vehicle in motion. This
winter tires are of the same make and have will improve the vehicle’s traction.
the same tread design.
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
section (Y page 250).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 176
176 Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely

affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
G Warning! force may become necessary to produce the
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make normal brake effect.
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
and from around the vehicle with the engine traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior back to normal.
resulting in unconsciousness and death. If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
Operation
should be tested as soon as possible after

not facing the wind. driving is resumed.
The outside temperature indicator is not Make sure not to endanger any other road
designed to serve as an ice-warning device users when carrying out these braking
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. maneuvers.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, Driving instructions
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
G Warning! To save fuel you should:
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in RKeep tires at the recommended inflation
order to obtain braking action. This could pressures.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
RRemove unnecessary loads.
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of control loss. RAllow engine to warm up under low load
Do not engage the transfer case in position use.
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At RAvoid frequent acceleration and
speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle deceleration.
steering is adversely affected by the LOW-
RHave all maintenance work performed at
RANGE ABS.
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
The most important rule for slippery or icy Booklet and as required by the
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt Maintenance system. Contact an
acceleration, braking and steering authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
system under such conditions. in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift short trips and in mountainous areas.
the automatic transmission to neutral
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 175).
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 177
Driving instructions 177
Drinking and driving Brakes

G Warning! Downhill grades
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
! When driving down long and steep
driving are very dangerous combinations.
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
shifting into a lower gear to use the
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
judgment.
overheating of the brakes and reduces
The possibility of a serious or even fatal wear.
accident are greatly increased when you drink
When using the engine’s braking power, a
or take drugs and drive.
Operation
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow period of time, e.g. on slippery road
anyone to drive who has been drinking or surfaces. This may cause serious damage
taking drugs. to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Pedals Continuous or hard braking

Make sure absolutely no objects are Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. cause excessive and premature wear of the
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all brake pads.
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
thereby significantly reducing their
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
the objects could get caught between the accident.
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
injury. for some time, rather than immediately park,
so that the air stream will cool down the
brakes faster.
Power assistance
Wet roads
G Warning!
There is no power assistance for the steering G Warning!
and the service brake when the engine is not After driving in heavy rain for some time
running. without applying the brakes or through water
Steering and braking requires significantly deep enough to wet brake components, the
more effort and you could lose control of the first braking action may be somewhat
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
in motion.
front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
advisable to brake the vehicle with
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 178
considerable force prior to parking. The heat G Warning!

generated serves to dry the brakes. If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
Salt-covered roads fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe
G Warning!
braking is substantially impaired. This could
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake result in an accident.
linings may cause a delay in the braking
effect, resulting in a significantly increased
! Only conduct operational or performance
braking distance, which could lead to an
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
accident.
Operation

To avoid this danger, you should: Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
Roccasionally brake carefully when you are otherwise seriously damage the brake
driving on salt-covered roads, so that any system or the transfer case which is not
layer of salt that may have built up on the covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
brake discs and the brake linings is Warranty.
removed without putting other road users
at risk ! Because the ESP® operates
Rmaintain
automatically, the engine and ignition must
a greater distance to the vehicle
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
ahead and drive with particular care
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
trip and immediately after commencing a Such testing should be no longer than 10
new trip, so that salt residues are removed seconds.
from the brake disc
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
Brake service system which is not covered by the
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the If your brake system is normally only
instrument cluster comes on although the subjected to moderate loads, you should
parking brake is released. Observe occasionally test the effectiveness of the
additional messages in the multifunction brakes by applying above-normal braking
display that may appear. pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the G Warning!
reservoir. Make sure not to endanger any other road
Have the brake system inspected users when carrying out these braking
immediately. Contact an authorized maneuvers.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 179
Driving off damage is not covered by the Mercedes-

Benz Limited Warranty.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating Prevent water from entering the passenger
temperature has been reached. compartment or the engine compartment. If
you must drive through standing water, keep
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do in mind that
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an Rthe maximum depth of the water may not
extended period with the ESP® switched exceed 19 in (48 cm)
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to Ryou must drive slowly
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. For more information, see “Driving through
Operation
water” (Y page 182).
! Simultaneously depressing the
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes Off-road driving
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz G Warning!
Limited Warranty. Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
could result in an accident.
Hydroplaning Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
when conditions indicate possible turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle
hydroplaning: cannot complete the attempted climb, back it
down in reverse gear.
X Reduce vehicle speed.
Do not drive along the side of a slope. The
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so
X Apply brakes cautiously.
the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
immediately steer into a line of gravity
(straight up or downhill).
Standing water Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
! Do not drive through flooded areas. You may lose control of the vehicle if you use
Before driving through water, determine its only the service brake. For information on
depth. driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”.
If you must drive through standing water, G Warning!
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
the passenger compartment or the engine
friction property can cause exceptional wear
compartment. Water in these areas could
and tear as well as brake failure.
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and
could result in water being ingested by the cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full
engine through the air intake causing braking power may not be available in an
severe internal engine damage. Any such emergency.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 180
Read this chapter carefully before you begin RBe especially careful when driving in
off-road travel. unknown territory. It may be necessary
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle to get out of the vehicle and scout the
characteristics and gear changing before you path you intend to take.
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving. RWatch out for obstacles, such as rocks,
We recommend that you start out with easy holes, tree stumps and ruts.
off-road travel. RAvoid excessive engine speeds – drive at
moderate engine speeds (max. 3 000
Special driving features for off-road rpm).
driving
RBefore driving through water, determine
Operation
The following driving features are available for its depth.

specific kind of operation:
RDo not stop vehicle while immersed in
RABS (Y page 51) water, and do not shut off the engine.
RESP® (Y page 52) RIn sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
R4-ETS (Y page 53) allowed by conditions. This helps
overcome the vehicle rolling resistance
RDifferential locks (Y page 93)
and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle
RTransfer case (Y page 91) sinking into the ground.
RDo not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It
Off-road driving rules interrupts the forward momentum of the
REngage the transfer case in position LOW vehicle.
before driving under off-road conditions RAlways drive onto slopes with the engine
(Y page 91). running and the vehicle in gear.
RIf necessary, activate differential locks RDo not shift automatic transmission into
(Y page 93). neutral position N.
The ABS, BAS and ESP® are switched off RInspect the vehicle for possible damage
automatically when the differential locks after each off-road trip.
are activated.
RFasten items being carried as securely as G Warning!
possible (Y page 126). Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
! Observe the following during off-road do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
driving: pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
RKeep doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/ with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
sliding sunroof closed whenever driving the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
off-road. rolling over.
RSwitch the cruise control off.
Checklist before off-road driving
RAdjust vehicle speed to condition of
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and Engine oil level
steeper the terrain, the lower the speed RCheck the engine oil level (Y page 149).
should be. Drive through water slowly at
an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 181
Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle Driving in steep terrain
obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on
steep gradients.
! If an engine oil level warning message
appears in the multifunction display while
driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location
or as soon at is safe to do so. Check the
engine oil level.
The engine oil level warning messages
should not be ignored. Extended driving
Operation
with the message displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not covered Slope angle
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
: Overhang angle, front
Tires ; Overhang angle, rear
RCheck the tread depth and maintain
specified tire inflation pressure. A placard : ;
with the recommended tire inflation G 550 37° 31°
pressures is located on the driver’s door B-
pillar (Y page 161). G 55 AMG 23° 26°
RCheck tires for possible damage and
RComply with the warnings (Y page 179) and
remove foreign objects.
rules for off-road driving (Y page 180).
RReplace missing valve caps.
RDriving on embankments, slopes and other
Rims steep inclines should only be done straight
RDented or bent rims can cause tire inflation up or downhill, i. e. in the line of gravity.
pressure loss and damage the tire beads. Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
For this reason, check and, if necessary, 80% grade which is equivalent to a slope
change rims before driving off-road. angle of approximately 38°. Keep in mind
that the climbing ability of the vehicle
Vehicle tool kit depends on terrain conditions.
RCheck if the jack (Y page 195) is RShift automatic transmission into gear
functional. range 2 or 1 (Y page 89).
RAlways take the vehicle tool kit, a strong RDrive slowly.
tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put RUtilize the engine’s braking power when
under the jack on sandy soil) with you.
descending a slope, observe the engine
speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply
the service brake as needed.
i For maximum engine speed, see
“Tachometer” (Y page 96) and see vehicle
specification for your vehicle
(Y page 248).
RCheck the brakes after a lengthy
downgrade drive.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 182
G Warning! Remember that, when stopped, the front

Never turn the vehicle around on steep wheels slide across a surface and thus lose
inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the their ability to steer the vehicle.
vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear. Driving through water
Traction in steep terrain

Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
continuous wheel traction when driving in
steep terrain.
Operation
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out

on a steep incline when the front wheels
have then the tendency to slip due to the
weight shifting away from the front axle.
The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and
limits the torque for the front wheels by
braking them. : Fording depth, 20 in (50 cm)
Simultaneously the torque for the rear RBefore driving through water, determine its
wheels is increased. depth.
! The water depth must not exceed 20 in
Driving across a hilltop
(50 cm). The ground under the water might
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift not be firm which could result the water
automatic transmission into neutral position being deeper than expected when driving
N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up the vehicle through it. Please note that the
too much after climbing a hill. water level is correspondingly lower for
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive flowing water.
across the hilltop. RComply with the warnings (Y page 179) and
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner rules for off-road driving (Y page 180).
prevents the vehicle from: RSwitch off the exterior lamps as well as the
Rlosing ground contact when cresting hills climate control.
Rlosing its forward momentum RShift automatic transmission into gear
Rspeeding up too much after climbing the hill range 1 or 2 (Y page 89).
RAvoid high engine speeds.
Driving downhill REnter and leave the water only at a shallow
RShift
spot, driving at walking speed.
automatic transmission into gear
range 1 (Y page 89). ! Never accelerate before driving into the
RDrive downhill observing the same rules as water. The bow wave could force water into
driving uphill (Y page 181). the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
i The special LOW RANGE – ABS RDrive through the water slowly and at a
(Y page 51) setting allows for precise and
constant speed.
brief (cyclical) blocking of the front wheels,
permitting them to dig into loose ground. RDo not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 183
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors vehicle underbody and suspension
while driving through water. Water could components. Failure to do so can adversely
otherwise enter the vehicle interior and affect the vehicle’s future performance,
damage the vehicle’s electronics, as well as including increased chance of an accident.
the interior equipment. When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and
RThere is a very high level of driving other obstacles, observe the following rules:
resistance in water. The surface is slippery RComply with the warnings (Y page 179) and
and may not be firm, making pulling away rules for off-road driving (Y page 180).
in water difficult and dangerous.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
RMake sure that only small bow waves are
Operation
RShift automatic transmission into gear
formed when driving the vehicle through
water. range 1 (Y page 89).
RClean RCheck the vehicle clearance before
mud off the tire tread after driving
through water. crossing obstacles.
RTo RCross obstacles (e. g. tree stumps or big
dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
brake pedal several times while driving rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front
after leaving the water. wheels at the center of the obstacle, and
repeat same with the rear wheel.
Crossing obstacles ! Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result
of its possible slanted position which in turn
may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling
over.
Driving on sand
G Warning!
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
! Obstacles can damage the vehicle pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
underbody or suspension components. If with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
possible use the assistance of a second the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
person outside the vehicle to scout the rolling over.
path you intend to take and check for
adequate ground clearance when you cross When driving on sand, observe the following
obstacles with your vehicle. The person rules:
assisting you outside the vehicle should RAvoid high engine speeds.
always be a safe distance away from the RShift automatic transmission into a gear
vehicle and positioned so that he or she range that is appropriate for the terrain.
cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected
RIn sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
vehicle movement.
conditions permit. This helps overcome the
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles,
vehicle rolling resistance and reduce the
inspect vehicle for any damage, especially
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 184
likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
ground. for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
RDrive in tracks of other vehicles if they are appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
not too deep and you have sufficient nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
clearance. tire dealer for repairs.
Off-road driving increases strain on the

Ruts vehicle.
A number of off-road tracks or other byways We recommend that you inspect the vehicle
have deep ruts which can cause the for possible damage after each off-road trip.
underbody to come in contact with the Recognizing any damage and a subsequent
Operation
ground. timely repair reduces the chance of a possible

breakdown or accident later on.
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
Proceed as follows:
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient.
Otherwise: RSwitch the transfer case to position HIGH
Ryour
(Y page 91).
vehicle may be damaged
Rthe
RSwitch differential locks off (Y page 93).
underbody of the vehicle may come
in contact with the ground and you may RClean all exterior lamps and check for
get stuck possible damage.
RAvoid RClean the front and rear license plate.
high engine speeds.
RComply with the warnings (Y page 179) and RRemove excessive dirt from tires, wheels,
rules for off-road driving (Y page 180). wheel housings, and underbody.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean the
RShift automatic transmission into gear radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and
range 1 (Y page 89). wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet
RDrive next to the ruts rather than through of water.
them if at all possible. RCheck tires for possible damage.
RIf the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with
RInspect vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake
one side of the vehicle on the grassy center hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody
strip if the route permits. for possible damage.
RCheck for brush or branches caught in the
Returning from off-road driving underbody.
G Warning! ! Brush or branches could increase the
Never drive on pavement with activated possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/
differential locks. Engaged front axle or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of
differential locks limits ability to move around the axles or drive shafts.
curves. RAfter continued operation in mud, sand,
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or water or other dirty conditions clean the
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you and clean axle joints.
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
RConduct a brake test.
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 185
Maintenance 185
Driving abroad specifications. Any adjustments on the

engine should, therefore, be carried out only
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S. by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
or Canada, you should request dealer authorized technicians.
network information for your destination from
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
Control and operation of radio
requirements. For details refer to the
transmitters
Maintenance Booklet.
Safety notes
Operation
G Warning!
G Warning! Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
Please do not forget that your primary health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
attention to the road must always be his/her unconsciousness and possible death.
primary focus when driving. For your safety Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
and the safety of others, we recommend that as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
you pull over to a safe location and stop If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
before placing or taking a telephone call. entering the vehicle while driving, have the
If you choose to use the telephone9 while cause determined and corrected
driving, please use the hands-free device and immediately. If you must drive under these
only use the telephone when road, weather conditions, drive only with at least one
and traffic conditions permit. Some window fully open at all times.
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the audio system or COMAND9 Maintenance
(Cockpit Management and Data System) if Notes
road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe The Maintenance System in your vehicle
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself tracks the distance driven and the time
and others. elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
required, and calls for the next maintenance
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
service accordingly.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second. We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center, in accordance with the
Maintenance Booklet at the times called for
Emission control
by the maintenance service indicator.
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law. accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
These systems will function properly only designated times/mileage will result in
when maintained strictly according to factory
9 Observe all legal requirements.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 186
186 Maintenance
vehicle damage not covered by the

Maintenance service indicator

message
The maintenance service indicator message
will notify you when the next maintenance
service is due.
Service A In XXXXX Miles (km)
Operation
Service A In XXX Days X Clearing the maintenance service

Service A Due Now indicator message manually: Press reset
button : on the instrument cluster.
The standard display appears in the
Maintenance service term exceeded

If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles
The type of maintenance service due is (Km)
indicated in the multifunction display: In addition, a signal sounds when the
¯ Basic service (A) message appears.
± Extended service (B) Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of reset the maintenance service indicator
maintenance services and intervals they need following a completed maintenance service.
to be performed at.
Calling up the maintenance service
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator display
indicator message
i The menu overview can be found on
The maintenance service indicator message
is cleared automatically (Y page 99).
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you You can call up the maintenance service
switch on the ignition indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is due.
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when X Switch on the ignition.
reaching the service threshold while driving
X Press button V or U on the
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
suggested maintenance service term has
passed
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 187
Vehicle care 187
until the standard display (Y page 99) damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
appears in the multifunction display. Limited Warranty.
X Press button * or & on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display with Vehicle care
the service symbol ¯ or ± and the Cleaning and care of the vehicle
maintenance service deadline appears in
the multifunction display. Notes
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of Regular and proper care will help to maintain
disconnection will not be included in the the value of your vehicle.
Operation
count shown by the maintenance service G Warning!
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
service deadline, you will need to subtract
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
these days from the days shown in the
Always follow the instructions on the
maintenance service indicator message or
particular container. Always open your
maintenance service indicator display.
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
Do not confuse the maintenance service inside.
indicator with the engine oil level indicator
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
4.
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
Resetting the maintenance service them out of reach of children.
indicator
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
In the event that the maintenance service on scouring agents. Never apply strong force
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
maintenance service indicator reset. surface to be cleaned.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying
While in operation, even while parked, your
out the maintenance service will find the
vehicle is subjected to varying external
information for resetting the maintenance
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
literature for your vehicle.
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such literature is available from any
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly
and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
from Mercedes-Benz.
RAir pollution
! If the maintenance service indicator was
RRoad salt
inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. RTar
Only reset if the proper maintenance RGravel and stone chipping
service has been performed. Resetting the
system without performing the proper To avoid paint damage, you should
maintenance service as called for by the immediately remove:
maintenance service indicator will result in RGrease and oil
engine damage and/or other vehicle RFuel
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 188
188 Vehicle care
RCoolant here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an

RBrake fluid authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RBird
The following topics deal with the cleaning
droppings
and care of your vehicle and give important
RInsects “how-to” information as well as references to
RTree resins etc. Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
Power washer
adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to ! Follow the instructions provided by the
Operation
deal with unfavorable conditions: power washer manufacturer on

Rnear maintaining a distance between the vehicle
the ocean
and the nozzle of the power washer.
Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
emissions) tires. The intense jet of water can result in
Rduring winter operation damage to the tire.
You should check your vehicle from time to Always replace a damaged tire.
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any Always keep the jet of water moving across
damage should be repaired as soon as the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
possible to prevent corrosion. parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of rubber parts.
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
check is a washing of the underbody followed Tar stains
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
need to be re-undercoated.
become more difficult to remove. A tar
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory remover is recommended.
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the Paintwork, painted body components
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
Benz because of the possibility of or similar materials to painted body
incompatibility between materials used in the components may damage the paintwork.
production process and others applied later. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
We have selected vehicle-care products and be applied when water drops on the paint
compiled recommendations which are surface do not “bead up”. This should
specially matched to our vehicles and which normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
always reflect the latest technology. You can depending on the climate and washing
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care detergent used.
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
Center. should be applied if the paint surface shows
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
damage due to negligent or incorrect care Do not apply any of these products or wax if
cannot always be removed or repaired with your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
the vehicle-care products recommended is still hot.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 189
Vehicle care 189
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for Automatic car wash

quick and provisional repairs of minor paint You can have your vehicle washed in an
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
doors, etc.). car washes are preferable.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
Engine cleaning recirculation mode using button g on
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, the climate control panel.
make sure to protect electrical components ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
and connectors from contact with water and touchless car wash which uses caustic
cleaning agents. spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
Operation
Corrosion protection, such as MB or ornamental moldings.
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
engine compartment after every engine If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage running it through the automatic car wash.
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The ! Make sure the combination switch is set
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be to wiper setting 0. Otherwise, the rain
protected from any wax. sensor could activate and cause the wipers
to move unintentionally. This may lead to
Vehicle washing vehicle damage.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
road salt as soon as possible. exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
to prevent damage to the mirrors.
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
Hand-wash sure the mirrors are folded out.
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle After running the vehicle through an
in direct sunlight. automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
clean the vehicle. will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent, which can be caused by residual wax on the
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car windshield.
Shampoo.
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a Ornamental moldings
diffused jet of water. X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
X Do not spray directly towards the moldings, use a damp cloth.
ventilation intake.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
and chamois frequently.
may have chrome appearance, they could
X Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry
be made of anodized aluminum that will be
with a chamois. damaged when cleaned with chrome
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
finish. those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 190
190 Vehicle care
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an Cleaning the rear view camera lens
ornamental molding is chrome-plated,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,

side markers, turn signal lenses
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
Operation
! Only use window cleaning solutions that

are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. X Only use clean water and a soft, non-
Window cleaning solutions which are not
scratching cloth to clean rear view camera
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lens :.
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that Be careful not to apply wax to rear view
contain solvents. camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using the
Cleaning the Rear Parking Assist Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with
system sensors plenty of water.
Rear Parking Assist system sensors are ! Do not clean the camera and the area
located in the rear bumper. around the camera
Rwith a high-pressure cleaner
Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper

blades
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
X Only clean Rear Parking Assist system
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper
sensors : by hand.
blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water and a soft, non- ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
scratching cloth to clean Rear Parking They could tear.
Assist system sensors : on the bumper.
! Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 191
Vehicle care 191
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
into place. should always be warmed-up before it is
X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
inserts with a clean cloth and mild several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
detergent solution. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
cleaning solution on all outside and inside Wheel Care products, take care not to
glass surfaces. spray them on the brake disks.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Plastic and rubber parts
Operation
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
the windshield before turning the SmartKey solution.
in the starter switch.
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper solution.
arm back. If released, the force of the The surface may temporarily change color.
impact from the tensioning spring could If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
crack the windshield.
G Warning!
! To clean the window interior, do not use
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the
containing solvents. Do not touch the steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents
inside of the front, rear or side windows will make the surface porous and vehicle
with hard objects such as an ice scraper or occupants could suffer serious injuries from
ring. Doing so may damage the windows. plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
bag deployment.
Light alloy wheels
If possible, clean wheels once a week. ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of surface.
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
Hard plastic trim items
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
clear coat. pressure.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
COMAND display
extended period of time immediately after
it has been cleaned. This applies especially ! You must switch off the COMAND display
after the wheel rims have been cleaned and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
can lead to increased corrosion of the ! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved These can damage or even destroy the
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel audio display screen.
paint if the vehicle is not driven after
cleaning.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 192
192 Vehicle care
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
with light pressure. and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever ! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly RWipe with light pressure only.
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
Leather Care.
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
Carpets
As leather is a natural product, it could
Operation
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and otherwise harden or become porous.

Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
RExercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
Headliner
should not become wet.
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Wood trims
X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
Seat belts
wood trims in your vehicle.
X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
! The seat belts must not be treated with wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the these may be abrasive.
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
(80†) or in direct sunlight. Chrome-plated exhaust tip
G Warning! Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
severely weaken them. In a crash they may and the classy appearance.
not be able to provide adequate protection. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
Upholstery been washed, especially during the winter.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing ! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
clothing that have the tendency to give off wheel cleaners as they could cause
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the corrosion.
upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will
be prevented.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 193
193

Where will I find ...? .......................... 194
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 196
What to do if … .................................. 213
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 221
Opening/closing manually .............. 223
Brush guard ....................................... 224
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 225
Replacing bulbs ................................. 226
Replacing wiper blades .................... 231
Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 232
Battery ............................................... 236
Jump starting .................................... 237
Towing the vehicle ............................ 239
Fuses .................................................. 242
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 194
194 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment The tool bag is located in a storage

compartment in the rear footwell.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all The jack is located in a storage compartment
features, standard or optional, potentially under the rear seat bench on the passenger
available for your vehicle at the time of side.
purchase. Please be aware that your X Removing tool bag: Open the rear door on
vehicle might not be equipped with all the driver’s side.
features described in this manual.
Where will I find ...?

First aid kit
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for

completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is stored in the storage pocket
in the front passenger door.
Tool bag
X Fold cover : to the side.
X Remove the tool bag from the storage
compartment using tab ;.
X Removing jack: Open the rear door on the
passenger side.
X Fold the rear seat bench forward
(Y page 128).
: First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit includes:
RTool bag with
- Fuse extractor
- Socket wrench for opening/closing the
power tilt/sliding sunroof in an Jack
emergency
X Open cover =.
- Pump handle for jack
X Open tab ?.
- Screwdriver
X Remove the jack from the storage
- Wheel wrench compartment.
RJack
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 195
Where will I find ...? 195
Jack X Set indent : of the pump handle onto

release bolt ; of the jack.
G Warning!
X Using the pump handle, turn release
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
bolt ; clockwise until its stop.
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
Release bolt ; is closed.
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is X Remove the pump handle from release
designed only for the purpose of changing a bolt ;.

wheel. X Set the pump handle into the pump lever
When using the jack, observe the safety notes as indicated by the arrow.
in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and Before placing the pump handle and the jack
the notes on the jack. back into the vehicle tool kit:
X Press the jack piston in again and close the
Practical hints
X Take the pump handle (three pieces) and
jack from the vehicle tool kit release bolt by using the pump handle.
(Y page 194). X Disassemble the pump handle.
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is located under a cover on
the outside of the vehicle’s tailgate.
X Removing: Take the screwdriver from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 194).
Pump handle
X Assemble the pump handle.
X Open lock : using the screwdriver.

i You can also use a coin to open the lock.
X Fold tab ; downwards.
Jack
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 196
196 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Keep hands from beneath the wheel.
After mounting the spare wheel:

X Transport the damaged wheel on the spare
wheel carrier, see “Storing the spare wheel
after use” for instructions.
X Repair or replace the damaged tire as soon
as possible and return the spare tire as
original spare.
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
X Pull cover ring = slightly outwards in see “Flat tire” (Y page 232).
direction of arrows and remove.
Storing the spare wheel after use
Practical hints
X Pull cover plate ? towards you.

X Secure the spare wheel with mounting
screws C on the spare wheel carrier
(Y page 196). Make sure the spare wheel
cannot come loose.
X Make sure catch B engages in recess A
when mounting cover plate 4
(Y page 196).
X Make sure tab ; (Y page 195) faces
downwards when mounting cover ring =
(Y page 196).
X For safety reasons, check regularly that the
X Remove cover plate ?. spare wheel is securely fastened.
Vehicle status messages in the

multifunction display
Notes
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
the multifunction display located in the
instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal.
X Unscrew mounting screws C. Address these messages accordingly and
X
follow the additional instructions given in this
Remove the spare wheel.
Operator’s Manual.
G Warning! Selecting the Vehicle status message
Make sure no one is injured when removing memory menu in the control system
the spare wheel. (Y page 102) displays both cleared and
Grip wheel from the sides. uncleared messages.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 197
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 197
High-priority messages appear in the Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property

multifunction display in red color. damage or personal injury.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using G Warning!
the reset button (Y page 95) or button &, No messages will be displayed if either the
*, U or V on the multifunction instrument cluster or the multifunction
steering wheel. display is inoperative.
Other messages of high priority and As a result, you will not be able to see
messages of less immediate priority can be information about your driving conditions,
cleared from the multifunction display using such as
the reset button or button &, *, Rspeed
U or V on the multifunction steering Routside temperature
wheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle
Practical hints
Rwarning/indicator lamps
status message memory menu
(Y page 102). Remember that clearing a Rmalfunction/warning messages
message will only make the message Rfailure of any systems
disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the Driving characteristics may be impaired.
message to appear. If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
G Warning! Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
All categories of messages contain important
information which should be taken note of On the pages that follow, you will find a
and, where a malfunction is indicated, compilation of the most important warning
addressed as soon as possible at an and malfunction messages that may appear
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. in the multifunction display.
Failure to repair the condition noted may For your convenience the messages are
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes- divided into text messages (Y page 198) and
symbol messages (Y page 202).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 198
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

ABS ABS not You have engaged the differential locks.
available X The ABS switches on again after the differential locks have
Differenti been disengaged.
al Locked
ABS ABS, ESP The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Inoperativ malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBB, the ESP® and the 4-
e See ETS are unavailable.
Practical hints
Operator’s X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock

Manual during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ESP Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
e See malfunction or an interruption in the power supply the ABS,
Operator's the BAS, EBB, the ESP® and the 4-ETS are unavailable.
Manual X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
accident.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 199

SRS Restraint There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint Systems
System (SRS). The air bags or the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Malfunctio (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an
n Service accident.
Required X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
immediately.
SRS Restraint There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint Systems

System (SRS). The air bags or the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Service (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an
Practical hints
Required accident.
X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
immediately.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Driving systems

AAS Service On inclines, the vehicle may start to roll down upon releasing
Required the accelerator pedal.
X Continue driving with added caution.
accident.
Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Cont. And e X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
SPEEDTRONI Mercedes-Benz Center.
C
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 200
Tires

Tire after The tire inflation pressure is being checked.
pressure driving X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed for a few
only minutes.
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Pres. e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire No Wheel There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Practical hints
Pres. Sensors (e.g. winter tires).

Monitor X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Inoperativ Mercedes-Benz Center.
e X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
Wheel Missing One or more sensors are defect (e.g. battery is empty).
Sensor The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
One or more wheels without appropriate wheel sensors

mounted (e.g. spare tire).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS is unable to monitor the tire inflation
Pres. Unavailabl pressure due to a nearby radio interference source or
Monitor e insufficient power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 201

Correct The tire pressure is too low in one or more tires.
The Tire or
Pres. The tire pressures of the individual tires differ from each other
significantly.
The tire pressure values are shown in the multifunction
display.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 156).
Caution One or more tires are deflating.

Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Practical hints
defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 232).
Check The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the
Tires minimum value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 202
Symbol messages
Brake
# Brake The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

Wear X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

Practical hints
Display messages
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.
(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 203
Safety systems
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
Driving systems
© Transfer The transfer case is malfunctioning.
Practical hints
Case X Do not switch the transfer case on.
Service X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Required possible.
© TC Shift The shift process in the transfer case was canceled because
Procedure of a malfunction.
Canceled X Repeat the shift process (Y page 91).
© TC Shift You have not met the shift conditions for a selection process
Conditions in the transfer case.
Not X Repeat the shift process (Y page 91).
Fulfilled
© TC In No gear has been selected in the transfer case, it is in

Neutral Neutral.
X Engage transfer case to gear position HIGH or LOW
(Y page 91).
G Warning! not hold the vehicle. The parking brake must

If the transfer case is in Neutral, the park be engaged to hold the vehicle in place.
position P of the automatic transmission will
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 204
Vehicle
: The tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate (Y page 61).
M You are driving with the hood open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 149).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
¡ You are driving with at least one door open.

Practical hints
X Close all doors.
+ Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
+ Get a new The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

key. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
~ Bluetooth The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMAND
Ready system via Bluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
¥ Top Up The fluid level has dropped to approximately 1/3 of total

Washer reservoir capacity.
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 153).
Engine
; Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to

the control system. The coolant temperature gauge or the
tachometer may have failed.
X Have the electronic systems checked at an authorized
+ Top Up The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 152).
See X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator's system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 205
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.
Practical hints
Stop, Turn X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Engine Off X Turn off the engine immediately.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 206
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Stop, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Turn X Turn off the engine immediately.
Engine Off
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.
cluster.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.

cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 207
# The battery has insufficient voltage.

X Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.
X Have the battery and the alternator checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
# The battery was charged with a battery charger or jump

started.
X Have the battery and the alternator checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
4 Engine The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.
Practical hints
Oil Level X Check the engine oil level (Y page 149) and add engine oil
Service as required (Y page 151).
Required X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
checked for possible leaks.
You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of

damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.
X Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its disposal.
It may be that there is water in the engine oil.

X Have the engine oil at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.

X Have the measuring system checked at an authorized
4 At next The engine oil level is too low.

gas X Add engine oil (Y page 151) and check the engine oil level
station (Y page 149).
add 1.0 X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
qt engine checked for possible leaks.
oil.
(USA only)
At next
gas
station
add 1.0
liter
engine
oil.
(Canada
only)
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 208
If the message At next gas station add station to refill your engine oil to the required
1 qt. (Canada: 1 liter) engine oil. level.
appears while the engine is running and at For information on approved engine oils
operating temperature, the engine oil level contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
has dropped to approximately the minimum or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
level.
! Engine oil level warnings should not be
The message will be stored in the vehicle
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
status message memory after you have
displayed could result in serious engine
cleared it from the multifunction display.
damage that is not covered by the
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
Practical hints
4 Engine There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine

Oil Level damage.
Stop, X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
Turn to do so.
Engine Off X Turn off the engine.
X Add engine oil (Y page 151) and check the engine oil level
(Y page 149).
8 Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Fuel X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Gas cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
is open. fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaky.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 147).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
´ Clean There is water in the fuel filter.

Fuel X Have the water drained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Filter Center as soon as possible.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 209
Lamps
b Reverse The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Lamp Right X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
b Brake The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Lamp Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
or
Brake
Lamp Right
b 3rd Brake The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This
Practical hints
Lamp message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Front The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Foglamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Left
or
Front
Foglamp
Right
b Front The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Left Side X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Marker
Lamp
or
Front
Right
Side
Marker
Lamp
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 210
b Parking The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A

Lamp substitute bulb is being used.
Front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
Auxiliary
Bulb On
or
Parking
Lamp
Front
Right
Practical hints
Auxiliary
Bulb On
b High Beam The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
High Beam
Right
b License The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Plate X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Lamp, Left
or
License
Plate
Lamp,
Right
b AUTO- The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Light automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to
manual (Y page 106).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 72).
b Low Beam The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Low Beam
Right
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 211
b Rear The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being

Foglamp used.
Auxiliary X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Bulb On
b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã
(Y page 72).
b Turn off The exterior lamp switch is set to Ã and you have forgotten
lights or to remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. The parking
Practical hints
remove key lamps remain switched on.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
or
X Switch off the headlamps.
b Tail The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb

Lamp, is being used.
Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Auxiliary
Bulb On
or
Tail
Lamp,
Right
Auxiliary
Bulb On
b Turn The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Auxiliary
Bulb On
or
Turn
Signal
Rear
Right
Auxiliary
Bulb On
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 212
b Turn The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Front X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 226).
Left
Auxiliary
Bulb On
or
Turn
Signal
Front
Right
Practical hints
Auxiliary
Bulb On
b Turn The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Signal In malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Left stopped working.
Mirror X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Turn
Signal In
Right
Mirror
Tires
h Correct The tire pressure is too low in one or more tires.

The Tire or
Pres. The tire pressure of the individual tires differ from each other
significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 156).
h Tire One or more tires are deflating.

Pres. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Caution steering and braking maneuvers.
Tire X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 232).
Defect
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 213
What to do if … 213
h Tire The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the
Pres. minimum value.
Check X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Tires steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
Practical hints
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps

(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
Lamps in instrument cluster and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster come on.
Notes
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
If any of the following lamps in the instrument come on when the ignition is switched on,
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- have it checked and replaced if necessary.
check when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 214
214 What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
indicator lamp the EBB, the ESP® and the 4-ETS are also switched off (see
comes on while messages in multifunction display).
the engine is The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
running. systems specified above available.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
Practical hints
hard braking, reducing steering capability.

X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 196).
accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
X If necessary, have the alternator and battery checked.
! The yellow ABS You have engaged the differential locks. The ABS, the BAS, the
indicator lamp EBB, the ESP® and the 4-ETS are switched off.
comes on while X The driving systems will switch on again after the differential
the engine is locks have been disengaged.
running.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 215

$ (USA only) The EBB switched off due to a malfunction.
J (Canada only) X Continue driving with added caution.
! X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The red brake warning Center as soon as possible.
lamp and the yellow Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
ABS malfunction accident.
indicator lamp comes
on while driving and an
acoustic warning
sounds for
approximately 5
Practical hints
seconds.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) X Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a
The red brake warning safe location as soon as it is safe to do so.
lamp comes on while X Engage the parking brake.
the engine is running. X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
multifunction display (Y page 196).
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 216
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
6 seconds after
starting the
engine.

Practical hints
+ The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 217

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® has been switched off.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
the engine is
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
running.
is spinning.
The cruise control is deactivated and cannot be switched on.
X Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 53).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Practical hints
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
You have engaged the differential locks. The ABS, BAS, EBB,
ESP® and 4-ETS are switched off.
X The driving systems will switch on again after the differential
locks have been disengaged.
d The yellow ESP® The ESP® or the 4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while The cruise control is deactivated.
driving. X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 53).

accident.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 218
Vehicle

The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
reserve warning lamp in X Refuel at the next gas station.
the fuel gauge comes
on while driving.
The yellow fuel tank The fuel cap is not closed properly.
reserve warning lamp in X Close the fuel cap.
the fuel gauge comes
on when the engine is
running.
Practical hints
Engine

= (USA only) There may be a malfunction in:
; (Canada only) RThe fuel management system
The yellow engine RThe ignition system
malfunction indicator
RThe emission control system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. RSystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
= (USA only) A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
; (Canada only) cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
The yellow engine X Check the fuel cap (Y page 146).
malfunction indicator X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
lamp comes on when X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
the engine is running. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 219
Tires

h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 196).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
Practical hints
Canada only:
Low tire
pressure telltale
for the
Advanced TPMS
illuminates
continuously.
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 196).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
G Warning! As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
should be checked every other week when system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure pressure telltale when one or more of your
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer tires are significantly underinflated.
on the Tire and Loading Information placard Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
different size than the size indicated on the significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
label, you should determine the proper tire Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
inflation pressure for those tires. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 220
handling and stopping ability. Please note that sequence will continue upon subsequent
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
maintenance, and it is the driver’s exists. When the malfunction indicator is
responsibility to maintain correct tire illuminated, the system may not be able to
pressure, even if underinflation has not detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. reasons, including the installation of
USA only: replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
the system is not operating properly. The malfunction telltale after replacing one or
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
the low tire pressure telltale. When the that the replacement or alternate tires and
Practical hints
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
flash for approximately 1 minute and then properly.
remain continuously illuminated. This
Lamp in center console

4/ A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the passenger seat.
The front passenger Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
front air bag off
indicator lamp The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
illuminates and seat installed on the passenger seat.
remains illuminated X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
(Y page 38). Mercedes-Benz Center.
4/ The system is malfunctioning.
The front passenger X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
front air bag off X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 47).
indicator lamp does not
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
illuminate or does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Mercedes-Benz Center.
seat properly installed Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
on the passenger seat. front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 221
Unlocking/locking manually 221
Unlocking/locking manually X Insert mechanical key ; into the lock

cylinder.
Unlocking the vehicle X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the to position 1 until the locking knob moves
SmartKey, unlock the driver’s door and the up.
tailgate using the mechanical key. The driver’s door is unlocked.
i Unlocking and opening the driver’s door X Remove mechanical key ;.
or the tailgate with the mechanical key will X Press lock cylinder and pull on door handle
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. to open the driver’s door.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in
the starter switch. Unlocking the tailgate
G Warning!
Practical hints
Removing the mechanical key
The tailgate swings open to one side. Always
make sure there is sufficient clearance for the
tailgate.
engine is running and while driving. Among
X Move locking tab : in direction of arrow.

X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
X Insert mechanical key = into the lock

cylinder.
X Turn mechanical key = counterclockwise
to position 2.
X Remove mechanical key =.
X Press lock cylinder and pull on door
handle : to open the tailgate.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 222
222 Unlocking/locking manually
Locking the vehicle i This procedure does not arm the anti-
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the filler flap.
SmartKey, lock it as follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the rear
doors, and the tailgate. Manually unlocking the gear selector
X Open the driver’s door. lever
X Press the central locking switch If the vehicle’s electrical system is
(Y page 60). malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could
The locking knobs of the front passenger remain locked in park position P. In this case
door, the rear doors, and the tailgate move the gear selector lever can be unlocked
down. manually, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
Practical hints
drained: Press down the locking knobs on

the front passenger door, the rear doors,
and the tailgate.
X Exit the vehicle.
X Close the driver’s door.
X Insert suitable tool : (e.g. a ball point pen)

into the covered opening.
X Simultaneously push tool : downward
and move the gear selector lever out of
park position P.
X Remove mechanical key ; from the X Remove tool :.
SmartKey (Y page 221).
The gear selector lever is unlocked.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the lock
The cover returns to its closed position after
cylinder. moving the gear selector lever to the
X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise to positions D+ and D-.
position 1.
i The gear selector lever is locked again as
The vehicle is locked.
soon as you move it back to park position
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
P.
it from the lock cylinder.
X Check if the tailgate is locked.
X If necessary, lock the tailgate with the
mechanical key (Y page 61).
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 223
Opening/closing manually 223
Fuel filler flap

G Warning!
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
filler flap.
In case the central locking system does not

release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
manually.
The fuel filler flap release is located on the X Pull fuel filler flap release A upwards in
passenger side in the cargo compartment
direction of arrow.
behind the side trim panel.
Practical hints
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 146).
X Open the tailgate (Y page 61).
X Connect the electrical connectors.
X Reinstall side trim panel = (Y page 224).
X Reinstall edge protection :.
X Close the tailgate.
Opening/closing manually
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
You can open or close the power tilt/sliding
sunroof manually should an electrical
X Remove edge protection : in direction of malfunction occur.
arrow ;. The power tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
i Before removing side trim panel = on the driver’s side in the cargo compartment
completely, the electrical connectors must behind the side trim panel.
be disconnected. X Open the tailgate (Y page 61).
X Pull off side trim panel = in direction of

arrow ? so the electrical connectors are
accessible.
X Disconnect the electrical connectors.
X Remove side trim panel = completely.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 224
224 Brush guard
X Remove edge protection : in direction of X Connect electrical connectors.

arrow ;. X Reinstall side trim panel =.
Shackles B in side trim panel = must be
i Before removing side trim panel =
hooked in side wall C.
completely, the electrical connectors must
be disconnected. X Reinstall edge protection :.
X Pull off side trim panel = in direction of X Close the tailgate.
arrow ? so the electrical connectors are X Store the tool bag with the vehicle tools in
accessible. the designated storage compartment.
X Disconnect electrical connectors.
X Remove side trim panel = completely.
Brush guard
Practical hints
A Socket wrench
X Take the tool bag out of its storage G Warning!

compartment (Y page 194). The brush guard is designed solely to enhance
X Take socket wrench A out of the tool bag. the appearance of the vehicle and help
X Closing/raising: Turn socket wrench A
protect grille and headlights from minor
mishaps, either on- or off road.
clockwise.
Since the safety characteristics are limited in
X Opening/lowering: Turn socket wrench
the event of an accident, brush guard are not
A counterclockwise.
intended to prevent injury or damage in the
event of an accident. Also check state and
local regulations on installation and use.
Raise and lower brush guard in an open space
with plenty of room.
i Only lower brush guard to clean

headlamps.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 225
Replacing SmartKey batteries 225
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the

environment if disposed of improperly.
X Lowering: While holding brush guard Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
firmly, open quick lock ; using locking and of disposal. Many states/provinces require
Practical hints
unlocking handle :. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for
recycling.
X Gently lower brush guard until it reaches its
fully lowered position. When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
X Raising and securing: Flip up brush guard
until it contacts end stop joint ?. When replacing batteries, always replace
Quick lock stop pin must engage the cross both batteries.
slot recess in lock =. i The required replacement batteries are
X Now turn quick lock ; so that quick available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
lock ; makes contact with end stop Center.
joint ?. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
X Lock quick lock ; on both sides of brush CR 2025 or equivalent.
guard using locking and unlocking X Remove the mechanical key from the
handle :. SmartKey (Y page 221).
! Make sure both quick stop pins are
seated fully in lock.
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are

discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
X Insert mechanical key : in direction of
G Warning!
arrow in side opening.
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
X Using mechanical key :, push slide ; to
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
of reach of children. unlatch battery compartment =.
X Pull battery compartment = out of the
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately. SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 226
226 Replacing bulbs
Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
i Since replacing bulbs is a technically

highly demanding process, we recommend
to have them replaced at an authorized
X Pull out batteries ? in direction of arrow.
X Insert new batteries ? under contact i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
Practical hints
spring A with the positive terminal (+) side fogged up on the inside as a result of high
facing up. humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
X Return battery compartment = into
the lights on should clear up the fogging.
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
X Slide mechanical key : back into the
Bulbs
SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs
Safety notes
Safe vehicle operation depends to a large
degree on proper exterior lighting and
signaling.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
Rtouch or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 227
Replacing bulbs 227
Front lamps RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.
Lamp Type RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
: Additional turn signal LED grease.
lamp RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
; Locator lighting lamp W6W on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
= Turn signal lamp 1156 NA
i Mercedes-Benz recommends using
? Side marker lamp T4W Longlife (LL) bulbs.
A Bi-Xenon headlamp: D1S-35 W Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Low and high beam10 lamps replaced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center:
Practical hints
Parking and standing W5W
RAdditional turn signal lamps in the exterior
lamp Blue Vision
rear view mirrors
B Front fog lamp H11 (55 W) RBi-Xenon lamps
RFront parking and standing lamps
Rear lamps
RLocator lighting lamps in the exterior rear
Lamp Type view mirrors
RHigh-mounted brake lamp
C High-mounted brake LED
lamp ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You
D Turn signal lamp PY 21 W could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced
Brake and tail lamp P 21/5 W at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tail, parking and W5W
standing lamp
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
E Backup lamp P 21 W
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
F License plate lamps C5W lamp, do the following:
X Switch off the ignition.
G Rear fog lamp P 21 W
H Side marker lamp T4W $.
Notes on bulb replacement Bi-Xenon headlamp

ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
G Warning!
with the specified watt rating.
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
to prevent short circuits. lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. It is
10 Bi-Xenon headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D1S-35 W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon
bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 228
228 Replacing bulbs
recommended to have such work done by a

qualified technician.
Front fog lamp bulb
X Hold front fog lamp A, gently push onto

bulb socket B, and turn bulb socket B
Practical hints
counterclockwise to its stop.

X Pull bulb socket B out of front fog lamp
Example illustration: Right front fog lamp (left front A.
fog lamp laterally reversed)
X Loosen and remove securing screws :.
X Remove front fog lamp trim panel ; in
direction of arrow and the seal.
X Pull bulb C out of its bulb socket.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket
B.
X Hold front fog lamp A, insert bulb socket
X Loosen and remove front fog lamp- B into front fog lamp A, and turn bulb
securing screws =. socket B clockwise to its stop.
X Insert front fog lamp A and install and
i Do not turn adjusting screw ?. If
tighten front fog lamp-securing screws =.
adjusting screw ? is turned, the front fog
X Install front fog lamp trim panel ; and the
lamp adjustment must be checked at a
Mercedes-Benz Center. seal.
X Install and tighten securing screws :.
X Remove front fog lamp A.
Front turn signal lamp bulb

X G 55 AMG only: Disengage the turn signal
guard from the clip in the rear and fold it
forward. Make sure the turn signal guard
does not strike painted surfaces.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 229
Replacing bulbs 229
Example illustration: Front side marker

X Remove turn signal lens ;. X Loosen and remove securing screws :.
Practical hints
X Remove side marker lamp housing ;.
X Press bulb = gently into the socket, turn

counterclockwise and remove it. X Remove dust cover =.
X Press the new bulb gently into the socket X Press catch aside and pull out the bulb
and turn clockwise until it engages. socket with the bulb from side marker lamp
X Reinstall turn signal lens ;. housing ;.
i Do not overtighten securing screws :.

Otherwise turn signal lens ; could be
damaged.
X G 55 AMG only: Remount the turn signal
guard.
Side marker lamp bulb

The following description applies to both, the
front and the rear side marker lamps. X Gently press onto bulb ? and turn
counterclockwise out of its bulb socket.
X Gently press the new bulb into the bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it engages.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 230
230 Replacing bulbs
X Insert the bulb socket back into side

marker lamp housing ;.
X Reinstall dust cover =.
X Reinstall side marker lamp housing ;.

Otherwise side marker lamp housing ;
could be damaged.
Example illustration: Left tail lamp lens (right tail

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps lamp lens laterally reversed)
Practical hints
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear X Loosen and remove securing screws :.
lamp, do the following: X Remove tail lamp lens ;.
X Switch off the ignition.
$.
Removing/installing rear lamp guard

(G 55 AMG only)
Example illustration: Left tail lamp unit (right tail

lamp unit laterally reversed)
= Turn signal lamp bulb
? Brake, tail, parking and standing lamp
bulb
A Tail, parking and standing lamp bulb
X Remove screws ;. X Gently press onto respective bulb =, ?,

X Swivel rear lamp guard : outward. Make or A and turn counterclockwise out of its
sure the guard does not strike painted bulb socket.
surfaces. X Gently press the new bulb into the bulb
X Swivel rear lamp guard : back after socket and turn clockwise until it engages.
replacing bulbs and fasten it with X Reinstall tail lamp lens ;.
screws ;. X Install and tighten securing screws :.
Tail lamp unit

X G 55 AMG only: Remove the rear lamp
guard.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 231
Replacing wiper blades 231
i Do not overtighten securing screws :. License plate lamps

Otherwise tail lamp lens ; could be
damaged.
X G 55 AMG only: Reinstall rear lamp
guard : (Y page 230).
Rear fog lamp/Backup lamp

The following description applies to both, the
rear fog lamp and the backup lamp.
Practical hints
X Remove license plate lamp lens ;.
Example illustration: Rear fog lamp

X Remove lamp lens ;.
X Replace tubular bulb =.

X Reinstall license plate lamp lens ;.

Otherwise license plate lamp lens ; could
be damaged.
Replacing wiper blades

X Gently press onto bulb = and turn
counterclockwise out of its bulb socket. Safety notes
X Gently press the new bulb into the bulb G Warning!
socket and turn clockwise until it engages. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
X Reinstall lamp lens ;. remove SmartKey from starter switch before
X Install and tighten securing screws :. replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper
motor could suddenly turn on and cause
i Do not overtighten securing screws :. injury.
Otherwise lamp lens ; could be damaged.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 232
232 Flat tire
G Warning! X Turn wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper

Wiper blades are components that are subject arm =.
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades X Press safety tab : of attachment link ?
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. down and slide wiper blade ; from the end
Otherwise the windows will not be properly of wiper arm =.
wiped. As a result, you may not be able to X Remove wiper blade ;.
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
Installing wiper blades
! Never open the hood when a front wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
Practical hints
impact from the tensioning spring could

crack the windshield or the rear window.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass or the rear window
without a wiper blade inserted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
this work carried out at an authorized
X Guide wiper blade : so that opening goes
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter through wiper arm ?.
switch. X Press wiper blade : into wiper arm ?
until safety tab ; engages in attachment
link =.
Removing wiper blades X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. windshield.
They could tear.
! Make sure the wiper blades are properly
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps installed. Improperly installed wiper blades
into place. may cause windshield damage.
Flat tire
Safety notes
When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you can
use the spare wheel as a regular road wheel.
However, the spare tire may not be older than
6 years. In addition, the rim and tire must be
of same size and model as the regular road
wheels.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 233
Flat tire 233
If the spare tire is more than 6 years old or is You must remove the spare wheel from the
not the same model as the regular tires, have spare wheel carrier before lifting the vehicle.
the spare tire replaced with a new tire at the Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. and injure you or others.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
X Remove the spare wheel from the spare
spare wheel mounted.
wheel carrier.
G Warning! X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the vehicle.
G 55 AMG: X Take the jack out of the vehicle.
Rim and tire size of spare wheel and regular For information on where to find the
wheel differ. Handling will be adversely respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
affected when the spare wheel is used. (Y page 194) and (Y page 195).
Practical hints
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50
mph (80 km/h). Lifting the vehicle
G Warning!
Preparing the vehicle When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
which has been specifically approved by
X Park the vehicle in a safe distance from Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when
possible. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle under the axle housing. Make sure
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
the jack is positioned correctly under the axle
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front housing. The jack must always be vertical
wheels are in a straight-ahead position. when in use, especially on inclines or
X Engage the parking brake. declines.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
position P. briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
X Turn off the engine. performing maintenance work under the
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
switch. jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change.
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway. Open Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
doors only when conditions are safe to do supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
so. away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
Mounting the spare wheel
Always firmly engage the parking brake and
Introduction block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle
X Prepare the vehicle as described
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
(Y page 233).
brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 234
234 Flat tire
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If

necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
not be able to achieve its load-bearing
capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by not yet remove the wheel bolts
Practical hints
blocking wheels with wheel chocks (not (approximately one full turn with wheel
included) or other sizeable objects. wrench :).
When changing wheel on a level surface: ! Do not position the jack on the body of
X
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
Place one wheel chock or other sizeable
the vehicle.
object in front of and another wheel chock
or other sizeable object behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a hill,
place a wheel chock or other sizeable object
and the other wheel chock or sizeable object
as follows:
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side blocking both
X Place the jack on firm ground.
wheels of the axle not being worked on.
X Position the jack under the axle housing so
G Warning! that it is always vertical as seen from the
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on side, even if the vehicle is parked on an
slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the incline.
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or Make sure the the jack is positioned
others. correctly under the axle housing. The axle
must fall into the jack contour.
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing the wheel

X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 235
Flat tire 235
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. i Never turn the release bolt of the jack
This could result in damage to the wheel more than one or two revolutions.
bolts and wheel hub threads. Otherwise hydraulic fluid can escape.
X Remove the wheel. X Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting
fully on its own weight.
Attaching the spare wheel X Remove the jack.
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
Practical hints
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use
following the diagonal sequence illustrated
the correct wheel bolts.
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe
G Warning! a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. G Warning!
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Have the tightening torque checked after
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the changing a wheel. The wheels could come
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
fall off the jack. 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel X Disassemble the pump handle.
hub.
X Press the jack piston in and close the
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat release bolt.
against hub and hold it there while X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
installing first wheel bolt. in the designated storage space.
X Guide the spare wheel onto the wheel hub X After changing the wheel, secure the
and push it on. damaged wheel on the spare wheel carrier
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them (Y page 195). Make sure the wheel cannot
slightly. come loose.
X Check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it if necessary.
Lowering the vehicle
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
X Using the pump handle, turn the release pressures listed on the Tire and Loading
bolt of the jack counterclockwise Information placard on the driver’s door
approximately one turn. B-pillar (Y page 161).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 236
236 Battery
Battery Keep children away.

Safety notes
A battery should always be sufficiently
Follow the instructions in
charged in order to achieve its rated service
this Operator’s Manual.
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
distance trips, you will need to have the
environment if disposed of improperly. Large
battery charge checked more frequently.
12-volt storage batteries contain lead.
When replacing a battery, always use a Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz. of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
Practical hints
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of

for an extended period of time, contact an batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe. G Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can result
G Warning! in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and Never lean over batteries while connecting.
precautions when handling automotive You might get injured.
batteries.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
Risk of explosion. allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
Fire, open flames and medical help if necessary.
smoking are prohibited A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
when handling batteries. which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Avoid creating sparks. flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
Battery acid is caustic. Do improper connection of jumper cables,
not allow it to come into smoking etc.
contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. G Warning!
Wear suitable protective Do not place metal objects on the battery as
clothing, especially gloves, this could result in a short circuit.
apron and faceguard. Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
Wear eye protection. of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Rinse any acid spills Take care that you do not become statically
immediately with clear charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
water. Contact a physician rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
if necessary. also should not pull or push the battery over
carpets or other synthetic materials.
Never touch the battery first. First touch the
outside body of the vehicle in order to release
any possible electrostatic charges.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 237
Jump starting 237
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The An accessory battery charge unit specially
battery could explode if touched due to adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
electrostatic charge or due to spark tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
formation. available. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
! As any other battery, the battery may authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
discharge if do not operate the vehicle for information and availability.
an extended period of time. Have the Charge battery in accordance with the
battery disconnect at a qualified workshop separate instructions for the accessory
or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center in battery charger.
such a case. You may also connect an
accessory battery charge unit expressly Have batteries charged at an authorized
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
Practical hints
vehicle model to maintain the battery batteries yourself, follow the operating
charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes- instructions for your charging device.
Benz Center for further information. Only use a battery charge unit with a
The battery, the battery ventilation hose maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
and the lateral plug must always be X Charge battery in accordance with the
securely installed when the vehicle is in instructions of the battery charger
operation. manufacturer.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal

clamps while the engine is running or the Jump starting
SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
G Warning!
electronic components could be severely
damaged. Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
Have the battery checked regularly at an
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
Never lean over batteries while connecting or
maintenance intervals or contact an
jump starting. You might get injured.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
Charging the battery flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
G Warning! A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
Never charge a battery while still installed in which is flammable and explosive. Keep
the vehicle unless the accessory battery flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is improper connection of jumper cables,
being used. Gases may escape during smoking, etc.
charging and cause explosions that may Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
result in paint damage, corrosion or personal result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
injury. Read all instructions before proceeding.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 238
238 Jump starting
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could power by an external battery or starter
otherwise seriously damage the automatic pack.
transmission which is not covered by the RJump starting should only be performed
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. when the engine and catalytic converter
are cold.
! Jump starting should only be performed
using the jump-start terminals located in RDo not start the engine if the battery is
the engine compartment. frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting ROnly jump start from batteries with the
attempts. same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
Do not attempt to start the engine using a with a more powerful battery could damage
battery quick-charge unit. the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
If the engine does not run after several damage will not be covered by the
Practical hints
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

checked at the nearest authorized ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
Mercedes-Benz Center. cross-section and insulated terminal
Excessive unburned fuel generated by clamps.
repeated failed starting attempts may RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
damage the catalytic converter and may not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
present a fire risk. that move when an engine is started or
Make sure the jumper cables do not have running.
loose or missing insulation. RShould the battery be drained completely,
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch let the donating power source charge the
any other metal part while the other end is vehicle for several minutes before
still attached to a battery. reattempting the starting process.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
started with jumper cables and the fully X Switch off all electrical consumers.
charged battery of another vehicle or an
equivalent starter pack. Observe the
following: X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
RAccess
park position P.
to the battery is not possible on all
X Open the hood (Y page 148).
vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
of the other vehicle, provide jump start
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 239
Towing the vehicle 239
Practical hints
Position B represents the charged battery of X Remove the jumper cables from positive
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. terminals ; and =.
X Flip up cover : of positive terminal = in You can now switch on the headlamps.
direction of arrow. X Slide cover : from positive terminal =
back.
! Never invert the terminal connections! X Have the battery checked at the nearest
X Connect positive terminal ; of charged authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
battery B with positive terminal = with a
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
terminal ; of charged battery B first. Towing the vehicle
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged Safety notes
battery B and run at idle speed.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
be transported with all wheels off the ground
battery B with negative terminal A with using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to equipment. This method is preferable to other
negative terminal ? of charged battery types of towing.
B first.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
discharged battery and run at idle speed.
suspension parts.
You can now turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not switch on the If circumstances do not permit the
headlamps under any circumstances. recommended towing methods, the vehicle
X Remove the jumper cables from negative may be towed with all wheels on the ground
terminals ? and A first. only so far as necessary to have the vehicle
moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be
employed.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 240
240 Towing the vehicle
! Before towing the vehicle observe the Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
following instructions: the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could starter switch position 2.
otherwise seriously damage the If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
automatic transmission which is not position 0 for an extended period of time, it
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
Warranty. case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment. remove SmartKey from starter switch and
Towing with sling-type equipment over reinsert.
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
G Warning!
supports.
With the engine not running, there is no power
RTowing of the vehicle should only be assistance for the brake and steering
Practical hints
done using the towing eye. Never attach systems. In this case, it is important to keep
a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the in mind that a considerably higher degree of
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension effort is necessary to brake and steer the
parts. vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels i If the battery is disconnected or
on the ground, the gear selector lever must discharged
be in neutral position N and the SmartKey
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
must be in starter switch position 2.
switch
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, the vehicle may be towed only Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at park position P
a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). RFor more information see “Battery”
If the vehicle is towed with one axle raised (Y page 236) or “Jump starting”
(observe instructions regarding flexible (Y page 237).
drive shaft and propeller shafts), the engine RFor information on manually unlocking
must be shut off and the SmartKey must be the gear selector lever, see
in starter switch position 1. Otherwise, the (Y page 222)
4-ETS may become engaged which may
cause loss of towing control. i When towing the vehicle with all wheels
G Warning! on the ground, note the following:
If circumstances require towing the vehicle With the automatic central locking
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with activated and the SmartKey in starter
a tow bar if: switch position 2, the vehicle doors lock if
Rthe engine will not run
a wheel is turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or above.
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system To prevent the vehicle doors from locking,
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply deactivate the automatic central locking
or in the vehicle’s electrical system (Y page 108).
This is necessary to adequately control the
i To signal turns while being towed with
towed vehicle.
hazard warning flasher in use, turn the
SmartKey in starter switch to position 2
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 241
Towing the vehicle 241
and activate combination switch for left or X Move the gear selector lever to neutral
right turn signal in usual manner – only the position N.
selected turn signal will operate. Upon X Shift the transfer case to neutral
canceling the turn signal, the hazard position N.
warning flasher will operate again. X To avoid damaging the vehicle, it should
only be tied down on the wheels/wheel
rims, not on chassis components such as
Towing eyes the transverse link or trailing arm.
Front towing eyes
Towing the vehicle - various problem

scenarios
Practical hints
! When removing drive shaft, place M10
nuts on bolts as distance sleeves and
tighten using M8 nuts.
Always install new self-locking nuts when
reinstalling the drive shaft.
X Comply with all towing information
(Y page 239).
: Towing eyes
In case of engine damage, transmission
Rear towing eye damage or malfunctions in electrical
The rear towing eye is located on the driver’s equipment
side under the rear bumper. X Move the gear selector lever to neutral
position N.
X Shift the transfer case to neutral
position N.
In case of transfer case damage or for

towing vehicle distances exceeding 30
miles (50 km)
The propeller shafts to the drive axles must
be removed.
: Towing eye In case of front axle damage

Raise the front axle when towing. The
Transporting the vehicle propeller shaft between the rear axle and the
transfer case must be removed.
When transporting the vehicle, you can use
the towing eyes for pulling the vehicle onto a
trailer or transporter.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 242
242 Fuses
In case of rear axle damage A blown fuse must be replaced by an

appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
When the rear axle is raised, the vehicle can
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
only be towed with a wheel lift or a dolly
the amperage recommended in the fuse
placed under its front wheels.
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
to advise you on this subject.
Stranded vehicle i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
Benz Center.
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be
done with the greatest of care, especially if If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
the vehicle is heavily loaded. cause determined and rectified by an
Note the following when freeing a stranded authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
vehicle: A fuse chart is located in the fuse box in the

RAvoid
passenger compartment. The fuse chart
pulling the vehicle abruptly or
explains the fuse allocation and fuse
diagonally, since it could result in damage
amperages.
to the chassis alignment.
RNever try to free a vehicle that is still
coupled to a trailer. Before replacing fuses
RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer X Engage the parking brake.
hitch receiver should be pulled backward in X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
its own previously made tracks.
park position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Fuses
Introduction switch.
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and Fuse boxes in passenger
systems secured by that fuse will stop compartment
operating.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
G Warning! positioned as described. Otherwise,
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
with the specified amperage for the system in and possibly impair fuse operation.
question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
determined and remedied by an authorized
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 243
Fuses 243
Fuse box in dashbord
i To make changing the fuses easier, fuse

X Open the driver’s door. box A can be folded down slightly.
Practical hints
X Opening: Remove cover : in direction of X Unscrew mounting screws B.
the arrows. X Fold fuse box A downward in direction of
the arrow.
Fuse box in front passenger footwell
Fuse box in middle tunnel
Removing front end stops
G Warning!
Do not drive the vehicle when the front end
stops are not correctly installed. Failure to
reinstall stops as indicated may result in
serious injury in certain frontal crashes.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied. Comply with information
X Open the front passenger door. on occupant safety section.
X Opening: Unscrew mounting screws :.
X Remove cover ; in direction of the arrow.
Front end stop on the right seat rail, left seat rail
laterally reversed
X
: Front end stop
Unscrew mounting screws =.
; Spacing
X Remove cover ? in direction of the arrows.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 244
244 Fuses
X Open the front passenger door.

X Remove both front end stops : of the
front passenger seat tracks using a
screwdriver.
X Move front passenger seat fully forward.
! When reinstalling front passenger seat

track stops, place end stops in correct
position. For your safety, maintain proper
spacing.
Opening fuse box
Practical hints
X Unscrew mounting screws :.

X Remove cover ; in direction of the arrow.
Fuse box in battery box

The battery box is located under a cover in
the rear footwell.
Replacement of fuses can only be performed
at a Mercedes-Benz Center.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 245
245

Parts service ..................................... 246
Warranty coverage ........................... 246
Identification labels .......................... 246
Vehicle specification G 550
(463.237) ........................................... 248
Vehicle specification G 55 AMG
(463.271) ........................................... 249
Rims and tires ................................... 250
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 252
Technical data
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 246
246 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty
i This Operator’s Manual describes all REmission Performance Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
purchase. Please be aware that your Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
features described in this manual. Control Systems Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Parts service
Replacement parts and accessories are
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Parts required for maintenance and repair available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
work. In addition, strategically located parts Center.
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and

reliable parts service.
Loss of Service and Warranty
More than 300 000 different parts for Information booklet
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Should you lose your Service and Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has Information booklet, have an authorized
been specifically developed, manufactured or Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz replacement. It will be mailed to you.
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
Identification labels
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 247
Identification labels 247
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can

be found
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door
B-pillar
Ron the frame in the passenger-side front
wheel house (Y page 247)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 247)
? VIN (on frame in passenger-side front

wheel house)
Technical data
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
; VIN
= Paintwork code
A VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)

; VIN
Example illustration G 550
= Paintwork code B Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
i Data shown on certification label are for certification exhaust emission standards
illustration purposes only. These data are
C Engine number (engraved on engine)
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to i When ordering parts, please specify
certification label on vehicle for actual data vehicle identification and engine number.
specific to your vehicle.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 248
248 Vehicle specification G 550 (463.237)
Vehicle specification G 550 (463.237) Electrical system G 550
The quoted data apply only to the standard Alternator 14 V/180 A

vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment. Battery 12 V/95 Ah
Engine G 550 Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 7A
Engine, type 273 Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)
Main dimensions G 550
Technical data
Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm)

Overall vehicle 186.2 in (4 730 mm)
Total piston 333.3 cu in length12
displacement (5 461 cm3)
Compression 10.7:1 width13
ratio
Output acc. to 382 hp/6 000 rpm height
SAE J 134911 (285 kW/6 000 rpm)
Wheelbase 112.2 in (2 850 mm)
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/
Track, front 59.7 in (1 515 mm)
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 800 - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm/ Track, rear 59.7 in (1 515 mm)
2 800 - 4 800 rpm)
Ground 8.5 in (217 mm)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm clearance, front
speed
Ground 8.1 in (205 mm)
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 clearance, rear
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm Turning circle 43.6 ft (13.3 m)
11 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
12 Inc.spare wheel.
13 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 249
Vehicle specification G 55 AMG (463.271) 249
Weights and ratings G 550 Engine G 55 AMG

Gross Vehicle 6 615 lb (3 000 kg) Output acc. to 500 hp/6 100 rpm
Weight Rating SAE J 134916 (373 kW/6 100 rpm)
(GVWR)14
Maximum torque 516 lb-ft/
Gross Axle 3 110 lb (1 410 kg) acc. to SAE J 1349 2 750 - 4 000 rpm
Weight Rating (700 Nm/
(GAWR), front15 2 750 - 4 000 rpm)
Gross Axle 3 965 lb (1 800 kg) Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
Weight Rating speed
(GAWR), rear15
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt Belt one: 1 289 mm
Vehicle specification G 55 AMG Belt two: 2 449 mm
Technical data
(463.271)
The quoted data apply only to the standard Electrical system G 55 AMG
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Alternator 14 V/180 A
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
special bodies and special equipment. Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW
Engine G 55 AMG Battery 12 V/90 Ah
Engine, type 113 Spark plugs, type NGK ILFR 6A
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, Spark plugs, 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
gasoline injection electrode gap
No. of cylinders 8 Spark plugs, 15 - 22 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 30 Nm)
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) Main dimensions G 55 AMG
Total piston 331.9 cu in Overall vehicle 186.2 in
displacement (5 439 cm3) length (4 730 mm)17
Compression 9.0:1 188.2 in
ratio
(4 780 mm)18
14 The GVWR is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) comprises weight
of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers, cargo, and if applicable, trailer
tongue load. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
15 The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight.
16 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
17 Inc. spare wheel.
18 Inc. spare wheel and brush guard (U.S. vehicles only).
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 250
250 Rims and tires
Main dimensions G 55 AMG on your vehicle such as the ABS or the

ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
Overall vehicle 79.7 in (2 025 mm) vehicle and tested and approved by
width19 Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding
the following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
height
equipment tires
Wheelbase 112.2 in (2 850 mm) May not apply to all approved tires. For
Track, front 59.1 in (1 501 mm) information on tested and approved
tires, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Track, rear 59.1 in (1 501 mm) Benz Center.
Ground 7.9 in (200 mm) Using tires other than those approved by
clearance, front Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Ground 7.9 in (200 mm) Limited Warranty.
Technical data
clearance, rear
! Using tires other than those approved by
Turning circle 43.6 ft (13.3 m)
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
Weights and ratings G 55 AMG Rpoor handling characteristics
Rincreased noise
Gross Vehicle 6 615 lb (3 000 kg)
Weight Rating Rincreased fuel consumption
(GVWR)20
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Gross Axle 3 263 lb (1 480 kg) Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
Weight Rating dimensional variations and different tire
(GAWR), front21 deformation characteristics that could
cause them to come into contact with the
Gross Axle 3 965 lb (1 800 kg) vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
Weight Rating tires or the vehicle may be the result.
(GAWR), rear21
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Rims and tires Center. A placard with the recommended
tire inflation pressures is located on the
Notes driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
! Only use tires which have been tested and have supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for driving at high speeds or for
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
vehicle loads less than the maximum
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
loaded vehicle condition. If such
to provide best possible performance in
information is provided, it can be found on
conjunction with the driving safety systems
the placard located on the inside of the fuel
19 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

20 The GVWR is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) comprises weight
of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers, cargo, and if applicable, trailer
tongue load. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
21 The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 251
Rims and tires 251
filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should available as standard or optional factory
be checked regularly and should only be equipment, but can be purchased from an
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
manufacturer’s maintenance Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
recommendation included with the vehicle. approved for your vehicle model may
For information on recommended tire require the purchase of rims of the
inflation pressure and supplemental tire recommended size for use with these
inflation pressure information for special winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
driving situations, see (Y page 154). and the standard or optional factory-
equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
i The following pages also list the approved your vehicle. For more information contact
rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Same size tires
Technical data
G 550 G 55 AMG
18" wheels Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 18 H2 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm)
All-season tires22 265/60 R18 110V M+S —
Winter tires22,23 — 265/60 R18 109H

M+Si
G 55 AMG
19" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 1.97 in (50 mm)
All-season tires22,24 275/55 R19 111V M+S
Spare wheel
G 550 G 55 AMG
Rim (light alloy) 7.5 J x 18 H2 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm)
All-season tire25 265/60 R18 110V M+S 265/60 R18 110V M+S
22 Radial-ply tires.
23 Not available as factory equipment.
24 Must not be used with snow chains.
25 Radial-ply tire.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 252
252 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil G 550 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) Approved engine
filter oils
G 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Automatic G 550 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission Transmission Fluid
G 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Front axle G 550 1.5 US qt (1.4 l) Hypoid Gear Oil
(SAE 85W-90)
G 55 AMG Hypoid Gear Oil
(Castrol SAF-XJ)
Rear axle G 550 1.9 US qt (1.8 l) Hypoid Gear Oil
(SAE 85W-90)
G 55 AMG Hypoid Gear Oil
(Castrol SAF-XJ)
Transfer case All models 2.96 US qt (2.8 l) MB part no.
A 001 989 28 03 10
Differential All models 0.47 - 0.63 US qt Brake fluid
lock (0.45 - 0.6 l) DOT 3+4,
mechanism (SAE J 1703)
Power steering All models approx. 1.06 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering
Fluid, or approved
Dexron III ATF
Brake system All models 0.87 US qt (0.82 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 253
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 253
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Cooling system G 550 approx. 12.8 US qt (12.1 l) MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/
G 55 AMG approx. 13.4 US qt (12.7 l) Antifreeze
Fuel tank G 550 25.4 US gal (96.0 l) Premium unleaded

gasoline (Minimum
G 55 AMG 25.1 US gal (95.0 l) Posted Octane 91
Fuel tank All models approx. 5.3 US gal (20.0 l) [Avg. of
reserve 96 RON/86 MON])
Air All models — R134a refrigerant

conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Technical data
Washer system All models 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate26
system (Y page 257)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 257)
Approved engine oils Please follow Maintenance System

recommendations for scheduled oil
Engine oils are specifically tested for their changes. Failure to do so will result in
suitability in our engines and durability for our engine or emission control system damage
service intervals. Therefore, only use not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
approved engine oils and oil filters required Warranty.
for vehicles with Maintenance System.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Use the table below to determine the
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). MB sheet number.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a Model Engine, MB sheet

specification other than those expressly type number
required for the Maintenance System, or G 550 273 229.5
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the G 55 AMG 113 229.5
Maintenance System will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
Warranty. outside of oil containers.
26 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 254
Viscosity grades for engine oils Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance
according to the lowest air temperature Booklet for replacement interval.
expected before the next oil change. Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information.
Premium unleaded gasoline

G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
Technical data
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking

materials near gasoline!
Engine oil additives
Turn off the engine before refueling.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
They may damage the engine. Damage or inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
malfunctions resulting from blending oil contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
additives are not covered by the Mercedes- Direct skin contact with fuels and the
Benz Limited Warranty. inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
Air conditioning refrigerant ! To maintain the engine’s durability and

R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG performance, premium unleaded gasoline
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning must be used.
system. If premium unleaded gasoline is not
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based available and low octane gasoline is used,
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the follow these precautions:
system will occur. RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
Brake fluid as possible.
G Warning! RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of acceleration.
the brake fluid is continuously reduced RDo not exceed an engine speed of
through the absorption of moisture from the 3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
atmosphere. light load such as two persons and no
Under extremely strenuous operating luggage.
conditions, this moisture content can lead to RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
reducing the system’s efficiency.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 255
is fully loaded or operating in RMisfire

mountainous terrain. RPower loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
Fuel requirements
gasoline which contains these additives,
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
octane number (posted at the pump) must be additives approved by us for use on
91 min. It is an average of both the Research Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. listing of approved product(s). Follow
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or directions on product label.
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and This only results in unnecessary cost and may
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one be harmful to the engine operation.
Technical data
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. ! Damage or malfunction resulting from
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not poor fuel quality or from blending additional
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. fuel additives other than those tested and
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be or Extended Limited warranties.
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark Coolants
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
Gasoline additives RCorrosion protection
A major concern among engine RFreeze protection
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only point)
the use of quality gasoline containing
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon The cooling system was filled at the factory
deposits. with a coolant providing freeze protection to
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
After an extended period of using fuels
protection.
without such additives carbon deposits can
build up, especially on the intake valves and ! Add premixed coolant solution only.
in the combustion area, leading to engine Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
performance problems such as: Antifreeze separately from each other,
RWarm-up hesitation could cause engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RUnstable idle
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
RKnocking/pinging
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 256
pressurized cooling system is reached at Anticorrosion/antifreeze

approximately 266‡ (130†).
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
The coolant solution must be used year round parts. The use of aluminum components in
to provide the necessary corrosion protection motor vehicle engines necessitates that
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement such engines be specifically formulated to
interval. protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
Coolant system design and coolant used such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
determine the replacement interval. The result in a significantly shortened service life.
replacement interval published in the Therefore, the following product is strongly
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
Before the start of the winter season (or once
of equal specification are used to renew the
a year in hot southern regions), you should
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
the proper level.
Technical data
concentration checked.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
The coolant is also regularly checked each
approved products of equal specification,
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this amount
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 257
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system G 550 6.4 US qt (6.05 l) 7.1 US qt (6.7 l)
G 55 AMG 6.7 US qt (6.35 l) 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
Technical data
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
Z
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 258
258
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 259
259
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 260
260
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 261
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time January 15, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 262
É4635844182xËÍ
4635844182
Order no. 6515 4101 13 Part no. 463 584 41 82 Edition B 2009

2009 Gclass

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2009 Gclass

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

463_AKB; 2; 52, en-US 2008-12-02T10:52:11+01:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.7.1

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Our company and staff congratulate you on

Introduction.......................................... 18 Safety and security.............................. 31

Practical hints.................................... 193

Technical data.................................... 245

1, 2, 3 ... Alternator (Technical data)

Batteries, SmartKey Central locking

Control system menus......................... 99 Delayed shut-off

Systems.......................................... 112 Remote door unlock....................... 139

F Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Opening and closing the windows..... 82 Lighter

Mirrors Transfer case.................................. 203

Oil level Operation.......................................... 81

Recovery services, Stolen vehicle Seating capacity................................. 162

SRS........................................................ 32 Premium unleaded gasoline............ 254

Tire Identification Number Treadwear indicators.............. 165, 174

Winter driving instructions............... 176

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Important notice for California retail Maintenance

Program brochure (in the USA) or the In the USA:

Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

G Warning! Problems with your vehicle

98 Vanderhoof Avenue Vehicle data recording

Exterior view ....................................... 24

B Lever for Voice Control K Exterior lamp switch 72

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel 27

Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

1 Function only available in telephone menu.

Function Page Center console

Function Page Lower part

30 Door control panel

Overhead control panel Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

= Right reading lamp on/off 77

? Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Vehicle equipment .............................. 32

Safety and security

Vehicle equipment to the restraint systems no longer functioning

Safety and security

www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ therefore only be performed by qualified

Safety and security

! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lb

Safety and security

devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM

system is not functioning.

Safety and security

this purpose, you can adjust the height of could tear.

Safety and security

X Pull both latch plates ? and C out of

X Push free-sliding latch plate C into buckle

Seat belt outlet height adjustment

X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height

Safety and security

instructions. These are available at any Seat and head restraint

G Warning! Observe the following points:

G Warning! Infant and child restraint systems

Safety and security

G Warning! i Information on child seats with mounting